1 //===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 // This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for
11 // SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's
12 // basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed.
13 //
14 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
15 
16 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
17 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
18 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
19 #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h"
20 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
21 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
22 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
24 #include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h"
25 #include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h"
26 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
27 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
28 #include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
29 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h"
30 #include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h"
31 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h"
32 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
33 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
34 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
35 #include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h"
36 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ISDOpcodes.h"
37 #include "llvm/CodeGen/SelectionDAGNodes.h"
38 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetLowering.h"
39 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h"
40 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetSubtargetInfo.h"
41 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ValueTypes.h"
42 #include "llvm/Config/llvm-config.h"
43 #include "llvm/IR/Argument.h"
44 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
45 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
46 #include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
47 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
48 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
49 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
50 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
51 #include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h"
52 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
53 #include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
54 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
55 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
56 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
57 #include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h"
58 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
59 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
60 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
61 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
62 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
63 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
64 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
65 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
66 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
67 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
68 #include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h"
69 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
70 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
71 #include "llvm/IR/User.h"
72 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
73 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
74 #include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h"
75 #include "llvm/Pass.h"
76 #include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h"
77 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
78 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
79 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
80 #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
81 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
82 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
83 #include "llvm/Support/MachineValueType.h"
84 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
85 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
86 #include "llvm/Target/TargetMachine.h"
87 #include "llvm/Target/TargetOptions.h"
88 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
89 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h"
90 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h"
91 #include <algorithm>
92 #include <cassert>
93 #include <cstdint>
94 #include <iterator>
95 #include <limits>
96 #include <memory>
97 #include <utility>
98 #include <vector>
99 
100 using namespace llvm;
101 using namespace llvm::PatternMatch;
102 
103 #define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare"
104 
105 STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated");
106 STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim,   "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated");
107 STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim,   "Number of GEPs converted to casts");
108 STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of "
109                       "sunken Cmps");
110 STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses "
111                        "of sunken Casts");
112 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address "
113                           "computations were sunk");
114 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated,
115           "Number of phis created when address "
116           "computations were sunk to memory instructions");
117 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated,
118           "Number of select created when address "
119           "computations were sunk to memory instructions");
120 STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved,  "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads");
121 STATISTIC(NumExtUses,    "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized");
122 STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded,
123           "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads");
124 STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized");
125 STATISTIC(NumRetsDup,    "Number of return instructions duplicated");
126 STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved");
127 STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches");
128 STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed");
129 
130 static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts(
131   "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
132   cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
133 
134 static cl::opt<bool>
135     DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
136                   cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
137 
138 static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch(
139   "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
140   cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion."));
141 
142 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs(
143   "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
144   cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs."));
145 
146 static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking(
147    "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
148    cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches."));
149 
150 static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract(
151     "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
152     cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
153 
154 static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract(
155     "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
156     cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
157 
158 static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion(
159     "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
160     cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in "
161              "CodeGenPrepare"));
162 
163 static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion(
164     "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
165     cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) "
166              "optimization in CodeGenPrepare"));
167 
168 static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect(
169     "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
170     cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders"));
171 
172 static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix(
173     "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), cl::ZeroOrMore,
174     cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions"));
175 
176 static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge(
177     "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
178     cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / "
179              "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio"));
180 
181 static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore(
182     "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
183     cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says."));
184 
185 static cl::opt<bool>
186 EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden,
187     cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating"
188     " the other."), cl::init(true));
189 
190 static cl::opt<bool> DisableComplexAddrModes(
191     "disable-complex-addr-modes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
192     cl::desc("Disables combining addressing modes with different parts "
193              "in optimizeMemoryInst."));
194 
195 static cl::opt<bool>
196 AddrSinkNewPhis("addr-sink-new-phis", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
197                 cl::desc("Allow creation of Phis in Address sinking."));
198 
199 static cl::opt<bool>
200 AddrSinkNewSelects("addr-sink-new-select", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
201                    cl::desc("Allow creation of selects in Address sinking."));
202 
203 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseReg(
204     "addr-sink-combine-base-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
205     cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseReg field in Address sinking."));
206 
207 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseGV(
208     "addr-sink-combine-base-gv", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
209     cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseGV field in Address sinking."));
210 
211 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs(
212     "addr-sink-combine-base-offs", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
213     cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseOffs field in Address sinking."));
214 
215 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineScaledReg(
216     "addr-sink-combine-scaled-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
217     cl::desc("Allow combining of ScaledReg field in Address sinking."));
218 
219 static cl::opt<bool>
220     EnableGEPOffsetSplit("cgp-split-large-offset-gep", cl::Hidden,
221                          cl::init(true),
222                          cl::desc("Enable splitting large offset of GEP."));
223 
224 namespace {
225 
226 enum ExtType {
227   ZeroExtension,   // Zero extension has been seen.
228   SignExtension,   // Sign extension has been seen.
229   BothExtension    // This extension type is used if we saw sext after
230                    // ZeroExtension had been set, or if we saw zext after
231                    // SignExtension had been set. It makes the type
232                    // information of a promoted instruction invalid.
233 };
234 
235 using SetOfInstrs = SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16>;
236 using TypeIsSExt = PointerIntPair<Type *, 2, ExtType>;
237 using InstrToOrigTy = DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>;
238 using SExts = SmallVector<Instruction *, 16>;
239 using ValueToSExts = DenseMap<Value *, SExts>;
240 
241 class TypePromotionTransaction;
242 
243   class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass {
244     const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr;
245     const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo;
246     const TargetLowering *TLI = nullptr;
247     const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI;
248     const TargetTransformInfo *TTI = nullptr;
249     const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo;
250     const LoopInfo *LI;
251     std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI;
252     std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI;
253 
254     /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction
255     /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it.
256     BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator;
257 
258     /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block.
259     /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with
260     /// multiple load/stores of the same address. The usage of WeakTrackingVH
261     /// enables SunkAddrs to be treated as a cache whose entries can be
262     /// invalidated if a sunken address computation has been erased.
263     ValueMap<Value*, WeakTrackingVH> SunkAddrs;
264 
265     /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function.
266     SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts;
267 
268     /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their
269     /// promotion for the current function.
270     InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts;
271 
272     /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion.
273     SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts;
274 
275     /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value.
276     DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt;
277 
278     /// Keep track of GEPs accessing the same data structures such as structs or
279     /// arrays that are candidates to be split later because of their large
280     /// size.
281     MapVector<
282         AssertingVH<Value>,
283         SmallVector<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>, 32>>
284         LargeOffsetGEPMap;
285 
286     /// Keep track of new GEP base after splitting the GEPs having large offset.
287     SmallSet<AssertingVH<Value>, 2> NewGEPBases;
288 
289     /// Map serial numbers to Large offset GEPs.
290     DenseMap<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int> LargeOffsetGEPID;
291 
292     /// Keep track of SExt promoted.
293     ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses;
294 
295     /// True if CFG is modified in any way.
296     bool ModifiedDT;
297 
298     /// True if optimizing for size.
299     bool OptSize;
300 
301     /// DataLayout for the Function being processed.
302     const DataLayout *DL = nullptr;
303 
304   public:
305     static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
306 
307     CodeGenPrepare() : FunctionPass(ID) {
308       initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
309     }
310 
311     bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override;
312 
313     StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; }
314 
315     void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override {
316       // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree.
317       AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>();
318       AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>();
319       AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>();
320       AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>();
321     }
322 
323   private:
324     bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F);
325     bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F);
326     BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
327     bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const;
328     void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
329     bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB,
330                                        bool isPreheader);
331     bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT);
332     bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT);
333     bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
334                             Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace);
335     bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS);
336     bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT);
337     bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I);
338     bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I);
339     bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load);
340     bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI);
341     bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI);
342     bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI);
343     bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst);
344     bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB);
345     bool placeDbgValues(Function &F);
346     bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts,
347                       LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted);
348     bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
349                           const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
350                           SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
351                           unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0);
352     bool mergeSExts(Function &F);
353     bool splitLargeGEPOffsets();
354     bool performAddressTypePromotion(
355         Instruction *&Inst,
356         bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
357         bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
358         SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts);
359     bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F);
360     bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I);
361   };
362 
363 } // end anonymous namespace
364 
365 char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0;
366 
367 INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
368                       "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
369 INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass)
370 INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
371                     "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
372 
373 FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); }
374 
375 bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) {
376   if (skipFunction(F))
377     return false;
378 
379   DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout();
380 
381   bool EverMadeChange = false;
382   // Clear per function information.
383   InsertedInsts.clear();
384   PromotedInsts.clear();
385 
386   ModifiedDT = false;
387   if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) {
388     TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>();
389     SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F);
390     TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering();
391     TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo();
392   }
393   TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI();
394   TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F);
395   LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo();
396   BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, *LI));
397   BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, *LI));
398   OptSize = F.optForSize();
399 
400   ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI =
401       getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI();
402   if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) {
403     if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F, *BFI))
404       F.setSectionPrefix(".hot");
405     else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F, *BFI))
406       F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely");
407   }
408 
409   /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be
410   /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide.
411   if (!OptSize && !PSI->hasHugeWorkingSetSize() && TLI &&
412       TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) {
413     const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths =
414        TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths();
415     BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin();
416     while (BB != nullptr) {
417       // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the
418       // optimization to those blocks.
419       BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode();
420       EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths);
421       BB = Next;
422     }
423   }
424 
425   // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an
426   // unconditional branch.
427   EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F);
428 
429   if (!DisableBranchOpts)
430     EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F);
431 
432   // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch,
433   // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges.
434   EverMadeChange |= SplitIndirectBrCriticalEdges(F);
435 
436   bool MadeChange = true;
437   while (MadeChange) {
438     MadeChange = false;
439     SeenChainsForSExt.clear();
440     ValToSExtendedUses.clear();
441     RemovedInsts.clear();
442     LargeOffsetGEPMap.clear();
443     LargeOffsetGEPID.clear();
444     for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) {
445       BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
446       bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false;
447       MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration);
448 
449       // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed
450       if (ModifiedDTOnIteration)
451         break;
452     }
453     if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty())
454       MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F);
455     if (!LargeOffsetGEPMap.empty())
456       MadeChange |= splitLargeGEPOffsets();
457 
458     // Really free removed instructions during promotion.
459     for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts)
460       I->deleteValue();
461 
462     EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
463   }
464 
465   SunkAddrs.clear();
466 
467   if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
468     MadeChange = false;
469     // Use a set vector to get deterministic iteration order. The order the
470     // blocks are removed may affect whether or not PHI nodes in successors
471     // are removed.
472     SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList;
473     for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
474       SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB));
475       MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true);
476       if (!MadeChange) continue;
477 
478       for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
479              II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
480         if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
481           WorkList.insert(*II);
482     }
483 
484     // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors.
485     MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty();
486     while (!WorkList.empty()) {
487       BasicBlock *BB = WorkList.pop_back_val();
488       SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
489 
490       DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
491 
492       for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
493              II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
494         if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
495           WorkList.insert(*II);
496     }
497 
498     // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by
499     // a single edge.
500     if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange)
501       MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F);
502 
503     EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
504   }
505 
506   if (!DisableGCOpts) {
507     SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints;
508     for (BasicBlock &BB : F)
509       for (Instruction &I : BB)
510         if (isStatepoint(I))
511           Statepoints.push_back(&I);
512     for (auto &I : Statepoints)
513       EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I);
514   }
515 
516   // Do this last to clean up use-before-def scenarios introduced by other
517   // preparatory transforms.
518   EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F);
519 
520   return EverMadeChange;
521 }
522 
523 /// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the
524 /// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block,
525 /// which has a single predecessor.
526 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) {
527   bool Changed = false;
528   // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block.
529   // Use a temporary array to avoid iterator being invalidated when
530   // deleting blocks.
531   SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks;
532   for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end()))
533     Blocks.push_back(&Block);
534 
535   for (auto &Block : Blocks) {
536     auto *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block);
537     if (!BB)
538       continue;
539     // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial
540     // edge, just collapse it.
541     BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
542 
543     // Don't merge if BB's address is taken.
544     if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue;
545 
546     BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator());
547     if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) {
548       Changed = true;
549       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n" << *BB << "\n\n\n");
550 
551       // Merge BB into SinglePred and delete it.
552       MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB);
553     }
554   }
555   return Changed;
556 }
557 
558 /// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block.
559 BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
560   // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it.
561   BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
562   if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional())
563     return nullptr;
564 
565   // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi
566   // node, then other stuff is happening here.
567   BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator();
568   if (BBI != BB->begin()) {
569     --BBI;
570     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) {
571       if (BBI == BB->begin())
572         break;
573       --BBI;
574     }
575     if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI))
576       return nullptr;
577   }
578 
579   // Do not break infinite loops.
580   BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
581   if (DestBB == BB)
582     return nullptr;
583 
584   if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB))
585     DestBB = nullptr;
586 
587   return DestBB;
588 }
589 
590 /// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an
591 /// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split
592 /// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these
593 /// blocks so we can split them the way we want them.
594 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) {
595   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders;
596   SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end());
597   while (!LoopList.empty()) {
598     Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val();
599     LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end());
600     if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader())
601       Preheaders.insert(Preheader);
602   }
603 
604   bool MadeChange = false;
605   // Copy blocks into a temporary array to avoid iterator invalidation issues
606   // as we remove them.
607   // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block.
608   SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks;
609   for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end()))
610     Blocks.push_back(&Block);
611 
612   for (auto &Block : Blocks) {
613     BasicBlock *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block);
614     if (!BB)
615       continue;
616     BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB);
617     if (!DestBB ||
618         !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB)))
619       continue;
620 
621     eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB);
622     MadeChange = true;
623   }
624   return MadeChange;
625 }
626 
627 bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB,
628                                                    BasicBlock *DestBB,
629                                                    bool isPreheader) {
630   // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge.
631   // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the
632   // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be
633   // spilled in the loop body instead.
634   if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader &&
635       !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() &&
636         BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor()))
637     return false;
638 
639   // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a
640   // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block
641   // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to
642   // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not
643   // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be
644   // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping
645   // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the
646   // predecessor of BB.
647   BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor();
648   if (!Pred ||
649       !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) ||
650         isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator())))
651     return true;
652 
653   if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())
654     return true;
655 
656   // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is
657   // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of
658   // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the
659   // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and
660   // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy).
661   // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to :
662   //   Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2.
663   // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming
664   // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such
665   // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies.
666 
667   if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()))
668     return true;
669 
670   SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs;
671 
672   // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in
673   // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB.
674   for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E;
675        ++PI) {
676     BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI;
677     if (DestBBPred == BB)
678       continue;
679 
680     if (llvm::all_of(DestBB->phis(), [&](const PHINode &DestPN) {
681           return DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) ==
682                  DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred);
683         }))
684       SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred);
685   }
686 
687   // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this
688   // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in
689   // Pred already.
690   if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred))
691     return true;
692 
693   BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred);
694   BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB);
695 
696   for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs)
697     if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred &&
698         DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB))
699       BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB);
700 
701   return PredFreq.getFrequency() <=
702          BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge;
703 }
704 
705 /// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single
706 /// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi
707 /// instructions.
708 bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB,
709                                     const BasicBlock *DestBB) const {
710   // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in
711   // the successor.  If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders),
712   // don't mess around with them.
713   for (const PHINode &PN : BB->phis()) {
714     for (const User *U : PN.users()) {
715       const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
716       if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI))
717         return false;
718       // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check
719       // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is
720       // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here.
721       if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) {
722         if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
723           for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
724             Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I));
725             if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB &&
726                 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I))
727               return false;
728           }
729       }
730     }
731   }
732 
733   // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB
734   // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block.  If so, we
735   // can't merge the block.
736   const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin());
737   if (!DestBBPN) return true;  // no conflict.
738 
739   // Collect the preds of BB.
740   SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds;
741   if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
742     // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator.
743     for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
744       BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
745   } else {
746     BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
747   }
748 
749   // Walk the preds of DestBB.
750   for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
751     BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i);
752     if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) {   // Common predecessor?
753       for (const PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) {
754         const Value *V1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
755         const Value *V2 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
756 
757         // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be.
758         if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2))
759           if (V2PN->getParent() == BB)
760             V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
761 
762         // If there is a conflict, bail out.
763         if (V1 != V2) return false;
764       }
765     }
766   }
767 
768   return true;
769 }
770 
771 /// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in
772 /// it.
773 void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
774   BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
775   BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
776 
777   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n"
778                     << *BB << *DestBB);
779 
780   // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge,
781   // just collapse it.
782   if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
783     if (SinglePred != DestBB) {
784       assert(SinglePred == BB &&
785              "Single predecessor not the same as predecessor");
786       // Merge DestBB into SinglePred/BB and delete it.
787       MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(DestBB);
788       // Note: BB(=SinglePred) will not be deleted on this path.
789       // DestBB(=its single successor) is the one that was deleted.
790       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *SinglePred << "\n\n\n");
791       return;
792     }
793   }
794 
795   // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB.  Update the PHIs in DestBB
796   // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have.
797   for (PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) {
798     // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it.
799     Value *InVal = PN.removeIncomingValue(BB, false);
800 
801     // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some
802     // value that dominates BB.
803     PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
804     if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) {
805       // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi.
806       for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
807         PN.addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i),
808                        InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i));
809     } else {
810       // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that
811       // we will be adding.
812       if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
813         for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
814           PN.addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
815       } else {
816         for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
817           PN.addIncoming(InVal, *PI);
818       }
819     }
820   }
821 
822   // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use
823   // DestBB and remove BB.
824   BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB);
825   BB->eraseFromParent();
826   ++NumBlocksElim;
827 
828   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
829 }
830 
831 // Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding
832 // derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls
833 static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(
834     const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls,
835     DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>>
836         &RelocateInstMap) {
837   // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object
838   // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding
839   // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls
840   DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap;
841   for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) {
842     auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(),
843                             ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex());
844     RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate));
845   }
846   for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) {
847     std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first;
848     if (Key.first == Key.second)
849       // Base relocation: nothing to insert
850       continue;
851 
852     GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second;
853     auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first);
854 
855     // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it.
856     auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey);
857     if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end())
858       // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off
859       // that, if there are enough derived object relocates.
860       continue;
861 
862     RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I);
863   }
864 }
865 
866 // Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all
867 // small integer constants
868 static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP,
869                                           SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) {
870   for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) {
871     // Only accept small constant integer operands
872     auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i));
873     if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20)
874       return false;
875   }
876 
877   for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++)
878     OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i));
879   return true;
880 }
881 
882 // Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to
883 // replace, computes a replacement, and affects it.
884 static bool
885 simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase,
886                           const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) {
887   bool MadeChange = false;
888   // We must ensure the relocation of derived pointer is defined after
889   // relocation of base pointer. If we find a relocation corresponding to base
890   // defined earlier than relocation of base then we move relocation of base
891   // right before found relocation. We consider only relocation in the same
892   // basic block as relocation of base. Relocations from other basic block will
893   // be skipped by optimization and we do not care about them.
894   for (auto R = RelocatedBase->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt();
895        &*R != RelocatedBase; ++R)
896     if (auto RI = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(R))
897       if (RI->getStatepoint() == RelocatedBase->getStatepoint())
898         if (RI->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex()) {
899           RelocatedBase->moveBefore(RI);
900           break;
901         }
902 
903   for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) {
904     assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() &&
905            "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object");
906     if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) {
907       // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates.
908       continue;
909     }
910 
911     if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) {
912       // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks.
913       // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived
914       // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance
915       // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation.
916       continue;
917     }
918 
919     Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr();
920     auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr());
921     if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base)
922       continue;
923 
924     SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV;
925     if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV))
926       continue;
927 
928     // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep
929     assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() &&
930            "Should always have one since it's not a terminator");
931 
932     // Insert after RelocatedBase
933     IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode());
934     Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc());
935 
936     // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type.
937     // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not
938     // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be
939     // cases like this:
940     // bb1:
941     //  ...
942     //  %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
943     //  br label %merge
944     //
945     // bb2:
946     //  ...
947     //  %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
948     //  br label %merge
949     //
950     // merge:
951     //  %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ]
952     //  %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)*
953     //
954     // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast
955     // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and
956     // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes.
957     Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase;
958     if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) {
959       ActualRelocatedBase =
960           Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType());
961     }
962     Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP(
963         Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV));
964     Replacement->takeName(ToReplace);
965     // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived
966     // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above.
967     Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement;
968     if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) {
969       ActualReplacement =
970           Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType());
971     }
972     ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement);
973     ToReplace->eraseFromParent();
974 
975     MadeChange = true;
976   }
977   return MadeChange;
978 }
979 
980 // Turns this:
981 //
982 // %base = ...
983 // %ptr = gep %base + 15
984 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
985 // %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
986 // %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5)
987 // %val = load %ptr'
988 //
989 // into this:
990 //
991 // %base = ...
992 // %ptr = gep %base + 15
993 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
994 // %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
995 // %ptr' = gep %base' + 15
996 // %val = load %ptr'
997 bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) {
998   bool MadeChange = false;
999   SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls;
1000 
1001   for (auto *U : I.users())
1002     if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U))
1003       // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint
1004       AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate);
1005 
1006   // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer
1007   // relocation to mangle
1008   if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2)
1009     return false;
1010 
1011   // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the
1012   // corresponding derived relocate instructions
1013   DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap;
1014   computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap);
1015   if (RelocateInstMap.empty())
1016     return false;
1017 
1018   for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap)
1019     // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against
1020     // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace
1021     MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second);
1022   return MadeChange;
1023 }
1024 
1025 /// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks
1026 static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) {
1027   BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
1028 
1029   /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once.
1030   DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts;
1031 
1032   bool MadeChange = false;
1033   for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
1034        UI != E; ) {
1035     Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1036     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1037 
1038     // Figure out which BB this cast is used in.  For PHI's this is the
1039     // appropriate predecessor block.
1040     BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1041     if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) {
1042       UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse);
1043     }
1044 
1045     // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1046     ++UI;
1047 
1048     // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the
1049     // pad.  If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad.
1050     if (User->isEHPad())
1051       continue;
1052 
1053     // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not
1054     // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the
1055     // cast.
1056     if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
1057       continue;
1058 
1059     // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast.
1060     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
1061 
1062     // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it.
1063     CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB];
1064 
1065     if (!InsertedCast) {
1066       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1067       assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
1068       InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0),
1069                                       CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
1070       InsertedCast->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc());
1071     }
1072 
1073     // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast.
1074     TheUse = InsertedCast;
1075     MadeChange = true;
1076     ++NumCastUses;
1077   }
1078 
1079   // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast.
1080   if (CI->use_empty()) {
1081     salvageDebugInfo(*CI);
1082     CI->eraseFromParent();
1083     MadeChange = true;
1084   }
1085 
1086   return MadeChange;
1087 }
1088 
1089 /// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from
1090 /// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to
1091 /// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced.
1092 ///
1093 /// Return true if any changes are made.
1094 static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI,
1095                                        const DataLayout &DL) {
1096   // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts.  This is a weaker condition
1097   // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms.
1098   if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) {
1099     if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(),
1100                                   ASC->getDestAddressSpace()))
1101       return false;
1102   }
1103 
1104   // If this is a noop copy,
1105   EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType());
1106   EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType());
1107 
1108   // This is an fp<->int conversion?
1109   if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger())
1110     return false;
1111 
1112   // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which
1113   // isn't a noop.
1114   if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false;
1115 
1116   // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted
1117   // to.  This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they
1118   // are.
1119   if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) ==
1120       TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1121     SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT);
1122   if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) ==
1123       TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1124     DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT);
1125 
1126   // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy.
1127   if (SrcVT != DstVT)
1128     return false;
1129 
1130   return SinkCast(CI);
1131 }
1132 
1133 /// Try to combine CI into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if
1134 /// possible.
1135 ///
1136 /// Return true if any changes were made.
1137 static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) {
1138   Value *A, *B;
1139   Instruction *AddI;
1140   if (!match(CI,
1141              m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI))))
1142     return false;
1143 
1144   Type *Ty = AddI->getType();
1145   if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty))
1146     return false;
1147 
1148   // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we
1149   // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic
1150   // block containing the icmp:
1151 
1152   if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse())
1153     return false;
1154 
1155 #ifndef NDEBUG
1156   // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption
1157   // for now:
1158   if (AddI->hasOneUse())
1159     assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!");
1160 #endif
1161 
1162   Module *M = CI->getModule();
1163   Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty);
1164 
1165   auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI;
1166 
1167   DebugLoc Loc = CI->getDebugLoc();
1168   auto *UAddWithOverflow =
1169       CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt);
1170   UAddWithOverflow->setDebugLoc(Loc);
1171   auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt);
1172   UAdd->setDebugLoc(Loc);
1173   auto *Overflow =
1174       ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt);
1175   Overflow->setDebugLoc(Loc);
1176 
1177   CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow);
1178   AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd);
1179   CI->eraseFromParent();
1180   AddI->eraseFromParent();
1181   return true;
1182 }
1183 
1184 /// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual
1185 /// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on
1186 /// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might
1187 /// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there.
1188 ///
1189 /// Return true if any changes are made.
1190 static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
1191   BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
1192 
1193   // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop.
1194   if (TLI && TLI->useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(CI))
1195     return false;
1196 
1197   // Only insert a cmp in each block once.
1198   DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps;
1199 
1200   bool MadeChange = false;
1201   for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
1202        UI != E; ) {
1203     Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1204     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1205 
1206     // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1207     ++UI;
1208 
1209     // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1210     if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1211       continue;
1212 
1213     // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in.
1214     BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1215 
1216     // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp.
1217     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
1218 
1219     // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it.
1220     CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB];
1221 
1222     if (!InsertedCmp) {
1223       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1224       assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
1225       InsertedCmp =
1226           CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getPredicate(),
1227                           CI->getOperand(0), CI->getOperand(1), "", &*InsertPt);
1228       // Propagate the debug info.
1229       InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc());
1230     }
1231 
1232     // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp.
1233     TheUse = InsertedCmp;
1234     MadeChange = true;
1235     ++NumCmpUses;
1236   }
1237 
1238   // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp.
1239   if (CI->use_empty()) {
1240     CI->eraseFromParent();
1241     MadeChange = true;
1242   }
1243 
1244   return MadeChange;
1245 }
1246 
1247 static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
1248   if (SinkCmpExpression(CI, TLI))
1249     return true;
1250 
1251   if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI))
1252     return true;
1253 
1254   return false;
1255 }
1256 
1257 /// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is
1258 /// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where
1259 /// this operation can be combined.
1260 ///
1261 /// Return true if any changes are made.
1262 static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI,
1263                                   const TargetLowering &TLI,
1264                                   SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) {
1265   // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was
1266   // already optimized by some other part of this pass.
1267   assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) &&
1268          "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction");
1269   (void) InsertedInsts;
1270 
1271   // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block.
1272   if (AndI->hasOneUse() &&
1273       AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent())
1274     return false;
1275 
1276   // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register
1277   // pressure.
1278   if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) &&
1279       !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) &&
1280       AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse())
1281     return false;
1282 
1283   for (auto *U : AndI->users()) {
1284     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U);
1285 
1286     // Only sink for and mask feeding icmp with 0.
1287     if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User))
1288       return false;
1289 
1290     auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1));
1291     if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero())
1292       return false;
1293   }
1294 
1295   if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI))
1296     return false;
1297 
1298   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n");
1299   LLVM_DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump());
1300 
1301   // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0.  There should only be
1302   // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any
1303   // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into.
1304   for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end();
1305        UI != E; ) {
1306     Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1307     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1308 
1309     // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1310     ++UI;
1311 
1312     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n");
1313 
1314     // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block.
1315     Instruction *InsertPt =
1316         User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User;
1317     Instruction *InsertedAnd =
1318         BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0),
1319                                AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt);
1320     // Propagate the debug info.
1321     InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc());
1322 
1323     // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'.
1324     TheUse = InsertedAnd;
1325     ++NumAndUses;
1326     LLVM_DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump());
1327   }
1328 
1329   // We removed all uses, nuke the and.
1330   AndI->eraseFromParent();
1331   return true;
1332 }
1333 
1334 /// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which
1335 /// includes:
1336 /// 1. Truncate instruction
1337 /// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits:
1338 /// imm & (imm+1) == 0
1339 static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) {
1340   if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) {
1341     if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And ||
1342         !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)))
1343       return false;
1344 
1345     const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue();
1346 
1347     if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue())
1348       return false;
1349   }
1350   return true;
1351 }
1352 
1353 /// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB.
1354 static bool
1355 SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI,
1356                      DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts,
1357                      const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) {
1358   BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1359   DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs;
1360   TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User);
1361   bool MadeChange = false;
1362 
1363   for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(),
1364                             TruncE = TruncI->user_end();
1365        TruncUI != TruncE;) {
1366 
1367     Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse();
1368     Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI);
1369     // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1370 
1371     ++TruncUI;
1372 
1373     int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode());
1374     if (!ISDOpcode)
1375       continue;
1376 
1377     // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an
1378     // implicit truncate.
1379     // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an
1380     // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the
1381     // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though.
1382     if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
1383             ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true)))
1384       continue;
1385 
1386     // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1387     if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser))
1388       continue;
1389 
1390     BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent();
1391 
1392     if (UserBB == TruncUserBB)
1393       continue;
1394 
1395     BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB];
1396     CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB];
1397 
1398     if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) {
1399       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1400       assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
1401       // Sink the shift
1402       if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
1403         InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1404                                                    "", &*InsertPt);
1405       else
1406         InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1407                                                    "", &*InsertPt);
1408       InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc());
1409 
1410       // Sink the trunc
1411       BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1412       TruncInsertPt++;
1413       assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
1414 
1415       InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift,
1416                                        TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt);
1417       InsertedTrunc->setDebugLoc(TruncI->getDebugLoc());
1418 
1419       MadeChange = true;
1420 
1421       TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc;
1422     }
1423   }
1424   return MadeChange;
1425 }
1426 
1427 /// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could
1428 /// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract
1429 /// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract
1430 /// instruction. Here is an example:
1431 /// BB1:
1432 ///   %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1433 /// BB2:
1434 ///   %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16
1435 /// ==>
1436 ///
1437 /// BB2:
1438 ///   %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1439 ///   %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16
1440 ///
1441 /// CodeGen will recognize the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract
1442 /// instruction.
1443 /// Return true if any changes are made.
1444 static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI,
1445                                 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1446                                 const DataLayout &DL) {
1447   BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent();
1448 
1449   /// Only insert instructions in each block once.
1450   DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts;
1451 
1452   bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType()));
1453 
1454   bool MadeChange = false;
1455   for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end();
1456        UI != E;) {
1457     Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1458     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1459     // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1460     ++UI;
1461 
1462     // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1463     if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1464       continue;
1465 
1466     if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User))
1467       continue;
1468 
1469     BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1470 
1471     if (UserBB == DefBB) {
1472       // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of
1473       // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not
1474       // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate
1475       // instruction to the BB of TruncUse.
1476       // for example:
1477       // BB1:
1478       // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm
1479       // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16
1480       //
1481       // BB2:
1482       //   ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does
1483       //   not have i16 compare.
1484       // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2
1485       //
1486       if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal
1487           // If the type of the truncate is legal, no truncate will be
1488           // introduced in other basic blocks.
1489           &&
1490           (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType()))))
1491         MadeChange =
1492             SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL);
1493 
1494       continue;
1495     }
1496     // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it.
1497     BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB];
1498 
1499     if (!InsertedShift) {
1500       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1501       assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
1502 
1503       if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
1504         InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1505                                                    "", &*InsertPt);
1506       else
1507         InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1508                                                    "", &*InsertPt);
1509       InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc());
1510 
1511       MadeChange = true;
1512     }
1513 
1514     // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift.
1515     TheUse = InsertedShift;
1516   }
1517 
1518   // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift.
1519   if (ShiftI->use_empty()) {
1520     salvageDebugInfo(*ShiftI);
1521     ShiftI->eraseFromParent();
1522   }
1523 
1524   return MadeChange;
1525 }
1526 
1527 /// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero
1528 /// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic.
1529 ///
1530 /// We want to transform:
1531 ///     %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false)
1532 ///
1533 /// into:
1534 ///   entry:
1535 ///     %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0
1536 ///     br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false
1537 ///   cond.false:
1538 ///     %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true)
1539 ///     br label %cond.end
1540 ///   cond.end:
1541 ///     %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ]
1542 ///
1543 /// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true.
1544 static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros,
1545                                   const TargetLowering *TLI,
1546                                   const DataLayout *DL,
1547                                   bool &ModifiedDT) {
1548   if (!TLI || !DL)
1549     return false;
1550 
1551   // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that.
1552   if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One()))
1553     return false;
1554 
1555   // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do.
1556   auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID();
1557   if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) ||
1558       (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz()))
1559     return false;
1560 
1561   // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work.
1562   Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType();
1563   unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
1564   if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits())
1565     return false;
1566 
1567   // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch.
1568   BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent();
1569   BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false");
1570 
1571   // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added
1572   // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width
1573   // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero.
1574   BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros));
1575   BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end");
1576 
1577   // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI.
1578   IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext());
1579   Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator());
1580   Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc());
1581 
1582   // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with
1583   // a compare against zero and a conditional branch.
1584   Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty);
1585   Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz");
1586   Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock);
1587   StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
1588 
1589   // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic
1590   // or the bit width of the operand.
1591   Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front());
1592   PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz");
1593   CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
1594   Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits));
1595   PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock);
1596   PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock);
1597 
1598   // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's
1599   // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the
1600   // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined.
1601   CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue());
1602   ModifiedDT = true;
1603   return true;
1604 }
1605 
1606 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT) {
1607   BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent();
1608 
1609   // Lower inline assembly if we can.
1610   // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to
1611   // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now.
1612   if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) {
1613     if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) {
1614       // Avoid invalidating the iterator.
1615       CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1616       // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause
1617       // reuse before a value is defined.
1618       SunkAddrs.clear();
1619       return true;
1620     }
1621     // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block.
1622     if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI))
1623       return true;
1624   }
1625 
1626   // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good
1627   // idea
1628   unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign;
1629   if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) {
1630     for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
1631       // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and
1632       // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes
1633       // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and
1634       // if size - offset meets the size threshold.
1635       if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
1636         continue;
1637       APInt Offset(DL->getIndexSizeInBits(
1638                        cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()),
1639                    0);
1640       Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset);
1641       uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue();
1642       if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0)
1643         continue;
1644       AllocaInst *AI;
1645       if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
1646           DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
1647         AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
1648       // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this
1649       // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and
1650       // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is
1651       // forbidden.
1652       GlobalVariable *GV;
1653       if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() &&
1654           GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign &&
1655           DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >=
1656               MinSize + Offset2)
1657         GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
1658     }
1659     // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the
1660     // alignment
1661     if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) {
1662       unsigned DestAlign = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL);
1663       if (DestAlign > MI->getDestAlignment())
1664         MI->setDestAlignment(DestAlign);
1665       if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI)) {
1666         unsigned SrcAlign = getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL);
1667         if (SrcAlign > MTI->getSourceAlignment())
1668           MTI->setSourceAlignment(SrcAlign);
1669       }
1670     }
1671   }
1672 
1673   // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the
1674   // cold block.  This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to
1675   // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation
1676   // into their uses.  TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data
1677   if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
1678     for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
1679       if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
1680         continue;
1681       unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
1682       return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS);
1683     }
1684 
1685   IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI);
1686   if (II) {
1687     switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
1688     default: break;
1689     case Intrinsic::objectsize: {
1690       // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.*
1691       ConstantInt *RetVal =
1692           lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true);
1693       // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can
1694       // invalidate our iterator.  Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case
1695       // this
1696       // happens.
1697       Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
1698       WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
1699 
1700       replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr);
1701 
1702       // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
1703       // start of the block.
1704       if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
1705         CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1706         SunkAddrs.clear();
1707       }
1708       return true;
1709     }
1710     case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr:
1711     case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: {
1712       ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0));
1713       if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() ||
1714           ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent())
1715         return false;
1716       // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it.
1717       ExtVal->moveBefore(CI);
1718       // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
1719       // optimizations don't touch it.
1720       InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal);
1721       return true;
1722     }
1723     case Intrinsic::launder_invariant_group:
1724     case Intrinsic::strip_invariant_group:
1725       II->replaceAllUsesWith(II->getArgOperand(0));
1726       II->eraseFromParent();
1727       return true;
1728 
1729     case Intrinsic::cttz:
1730     case Intrinsic::ctlz:
1731       // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it.
1732       return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT);
1733     }
1734 
1735     if (TLI) {
1736       SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps;
1737       Type *AccessTy;
1738       if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy))
1739         while (!PtrOps.empty()) {
1740           Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val();
1741           unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
1742           if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS))
1743             return true;
1744         }
1745     }
1746   }
1747 
1748   // From here on out we're working with named functions.
1749   if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false;
1750 
1751   // Lower all default uses of _chk calls.  This is very similar
1752   // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls
1753   // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default
1754   // "don't know" as the objectsize.  Anything else should be left alone.
1755   FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true);
1756   if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) {
1757     CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
1758     CI->eraseFromParent();
1759     return true;
1760   }
1761 
1762   return false;
1763 }
1764 
1765 /// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor
1766 /// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is:
1767 /// @code
1768 /// bb0:
1769 ///   %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1770 ///   br label %return
1771 /// bb1:
1772 ///   %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1773 ///   br label %return
1774 /// bb2:
1775 ///   %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1776 ///   br label %return
1777 /// return:
1778 ///   %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ]
1779 ///   ret i32 %retval
1780 /// @endcode
1781 ///
1782 /// =>
1783 ///
1784 /// @code
1785 /// bb0:
1786 ///   %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1787 ///   ret i32 %tmp0
1788 /// bb1:
1789 ///   %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1790 ///   ret i32 %tmp1
1791 /// bb2:
1792 ///   %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1793 ///   ret i32 %tmp2
1794 /// @endcode
1795 bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) {
1796   if (!TLI)
1797     return false;
1798 
1799   ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1800   if (!RetI)
1801     return false;
1802 
1803   PHINode *PN = nullptr;
1804   BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr;
1805   Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue();
1806   if (V) {
1807     BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V);
1808     if (BCI)
1809       V = BCI->getOperand(0);
1810 
1811     PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V);
1812     if (!PN)
1813       return false;
1814   }
1815 
1816   if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB)
1817     return false;
1818 
1819   // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the
1820   // return is the first instruction in the block.
1821   if (PN) {
1822     BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1823     do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI));
1824     if (&*BI == BCI)
1825       // Also skip over the bitcast.
1826       ++BI;
1827     if (&*BI != RetI)
1828       return false;
1829   } else {
1830     BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1831     while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI;
1832     if (&*BI != RetI)
1833       return false;
1834   }
1835 
1836   /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail
1837   /// call.
1838   const Function *F = BB->getParent();
1839   SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls;
1840   if (PN) {
1841     for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
1842       CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I));
1843       // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call.
1844       if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) &&
1845           TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
1846           attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
1847         TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1848     }
1849   } else {
1850     SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs;
1851     for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
1852       if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second)
1853         continue;
1854 
1855       BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList();
1856       BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin();
1857       BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend();
1858       do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI));
1859       if (RI == RE)
1860         continue;
1861 
1862       CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI);
1863       if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
1864           attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
1865         TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1866     }
1867   }
1868 
1869   bool Changed = false;
1870   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) {
1871     CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i];
1872     CallSite CS(CI);
1873 
1874     // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to
1875     // the return block.
1876     BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent();
1877     BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator());
1878     if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
1879       continue;
1880 
1881     // Duplicate the return into CallBB.
1882     (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB);
1883     ModifiedDT = Changed = true;
1884     ++NumRetsDup;
1885   }
1886 
1887   // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
1888   if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
1889     BB->eraseFromParent();
1890 
1891   return Changed;
1892 }
1893 
1894 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1895 // Memory Optimization
1896 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1897 
1898 namespace {
1899 
1900 /// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode
1901 /// which holds actual Value*'s for register values.
1902 struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode {
1903   Value *BaseReg = nullptr;
1904   Value *ScaledReg = nullptr;
1905   Value *OriginalValue = nullptr;
1906 
1907   enum FieldName {
1908     NoField        = 0x00,
1909     BaseRegField   = 0x01,
1910     BaseGVField    = 0x02,
1911     BaseOffsField  = 0x04,
1912     ScaledRegField = 0x08,
1913     ScaleField     = 0x10,
1914     MultipleFields = 0xff
1915   };
1916 
1917   ExtAddrMode() = default;
1918 
1919   void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
1920   void dump() const;
1921 
1922   FieldName compare(const ExtAddrMode &other) {
1923     // First check that the types are the same on each field, as differing types
1924     // is something we can't cope with later on.
1925     if (BaseReg && other.BaseReg &&
1926         BaseReg->getType() != other.BaseReg->getType())
1927       return MultipleFields;
1928     if (BaseGV && other.BaseGV &&
1929         BaseGV->getType() != other.BaseGV->getType())
1930       return MultipleFields;
1931     if (ScaledReg && other.ScaledReg &&
1932         ScaledReg->getType() != other.ScaledReg->getType())
1933       return MultipleFields;
1934 
1935     // Check each field to see if it differs.
1936     unsigned Result = NoField;
1937     if (BaseReg != other.BaseReg)
1938       Result |= BaseRegField;
1939     if (BaseGV != other.BaseGV)
1940       Result |= BaseGVField;
1941     if (BaseOffs != other.BaseOffs)
1942       Result |= BaseOffsField;
1943     if (ScaledReg != other.ScaledReg)
1944       Result |= ScaledRegField;
1945     // Don't count 0 as being a different scale, because that actually means
1946     // unscaled (which will already be counted by having no ScaledReg).
1947     if (Scale && other.Scale && Scale != other.Scale)
1948       Result |= ScaleField;
1949 
1950     if (countPopulation(Result) > 1)
1951       return MultipleFields;
1952     else
1953       return static_cast<FieldName>(Result);
1954   }
1955 
1956   // An AddrMode is trivial if it involves no calculation i.e. it is just a base
1957   // with no offset.
1958   bool isTrivial() {
1959     // An AddrMode is (BaseGV + BaseReg + BaseOffs + ScaleReg * Scale) so it is
1960     // trivial if at most one of these terms is nonzero, except that BaseGV and
1961     // BaseReg both being zero actually means a null pointer value, which we
1962     // consider to be 'non-zero' here.
1963     return !BaseOffs && !Scale && !(BaseGV && BaseReg);
1964   }
1965 
1966   Value *GetFieldAsValue(FieldName Field, Type *IntPtrTy) {
1967     switch (Field) {
1968     default:
1969       return nullptr;
1970     case BaseRegField:
1971       return BaseReg;
1972     case BaseGVField:
1973       return BaseGV;
1974     case ScaledRegField:
1975       return ScaledReg;
1976     case BaseOffsField:
1977       return ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffs);
1978     }
1979   }
1980 
1981   void SetCombinedField(FieldName Field, Value *V,
1982                         const SmallVectorImpl<ExtAddrMode> &AddrModes) {
1983     switch (Field) {
1984     default:
1985       llvm_unreachable("Unhandled fields are expected to be rejected earlier");
1986       break;
1987     case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField:
1988       BaseReg = V;
1989       break;
1990     case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField:
1991       // A combined BaseGV is an Instruction, not a GlobalValue, so it goes
1992       // in the BaseReg field.
1993       assert(BaseReg == nullptr);
1994       BaseReg = V;
1995       BaseGV = nullptr;
1996       break;
1997     case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField:
1998       ScaledReg = V;
1999       // If we have a mix of scaled and unscaled addrmodes then we want scale
2000       // to be the scale and not zero.
2001       if (!Scale)
2002         for (const ExtAddrMode &AM : AddrModes)
2003           if (AM.Scale) {
2004             Scale = AM.Scale;
2005             break;
2006           }
2007       break;
2008     case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField:
2009       // The offset is no longer a constant, so it goes in ScaledReg with a
2010       // scale of 1.
2011       assert(ScaledReg == nullptr);
2012       ScaledReg = V;
2013       Scale = 1;
2014       BaseOffs = 0;
2015       break;
2016     }
2017   }
2018 };
2019 
2020 } // end anonymous namespace
2021 
2022 #ifndef NDEBUG
2023 static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) {
2024   AM.print(OS);
2025   return OS;
2026 }
2027 #endif
2028 
2029 #if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP)
2030 void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
2031   bool NeedPlus = false;
2032   OS << "[";
2033   if (BaseGV) {
2034     OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2035        << "GV:";
2036     BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
2037     NeedPlus = true;
2038   }
2039 
2040   if (BaseOffs) {
2041     OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2042        << BaseOffs;
2043     NeedPlus = true;
2044   }
2045 
2046   if (BaseReg) {
2047     OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2048        << "Base:";
2049     BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
2050     NeedPlus = true;
2051   }
2052   if (Scale) {
2053     OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2054        << Scale << "*";
2055     ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
2056   }
2057 
2058   OS << ']';
2059 }
2060 
2061 LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const {
2062   print(dbgs());
2063   dbgs() << '\n';
2064 }
2065 #endif
2066 
2067 namespace {
2068 
2069 /// This class provides transaction based operation on the IR.
2070 /// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and
2071 /// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called.
2072 class TypePromotionTransaction {
2073   /// This represents the common interface of the individual transaction.
2074   /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on
2075   /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction.
2076   class TypePromotionAction {
2077   protected:
2078     /// The Instruction modified.
2079     Instruction *Inst;
2080 
2081   public:
2082     /// Constructor of the action.
2083     /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR.
2084     TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {}
2085 
2086     virtual ~TypePromotionAction() = default;
2087 
2088     /// Undo the modification done by this action.
2089     /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was
2090     /// before this action was applied.
2091     /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same
2092     /// state as it was directly after this action was applied.
2093     virtual void undo() = 0;
2094 
2095     /// Advocate every change made by this action.
2096     /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important
2097     /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever.
2098     virtual void commit() {
2099       // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything.
2100     }
2101   };
2102 
2103   /// Utility to remember the position of an instruction.
2104   class InsertionHandler {
2105     /// Position of an instruction.
2106     /// Either an instruction:
2107     /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used.
2108     /// - Has a previous instruction: PrevInst is used.
2109     union {
2110       Instruction *PrevInst;
2111       BasicBlock *BB;
2112     } Point;
2113 
2114     /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction.
2115     bool HasPrevInstruction;
2116 
2117   public:
2118     /// Record the position of \p Inst.
2119     InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) {
2120       BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator();
2121       HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin()));
2122       if (HasPrevInstruction)
2123         Point.PrevInst = &*--It;
2124       else
2125         Point.BB = Inst->getParent();
2126     }
2127 
2128     /// Insert \p Inst at the recorded position.
2129     void insert(Instruction *Inst) {
2130       if (HasPrevInstruction) {
2131         if (Inst->getParent())
2132           Inst->removeFromParent();
2133         Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst);
2134       } else {
2135         Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
2136         if (Inst->getParent())
2137           Inst->moveBefore(Position);
2138         else
2139           Inst->insertBefore(Position);
2140       }
2141     }
2142   };
2143 
2144   /// Move an instruction before another.
2145   class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction {
2146     /// Original position of the instruction.
2147     InsertionHandler Position;
2148 
2149   public:
2150     /// Move \p Inst before \p Before.
2151     InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before)
2152         : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) {
2153       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before
2154                         << "\n");
2155       Inst->moveBefore(Before);
2156     }
2157 
2158     /// Move the instruction back to its original position.
2159     void undo() override {
2160       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n");
2161       Position.insert(Inst);
2162     }
2163   };
2164 
2165   /// Set the operand of an instruction with a new value.
2166   class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction {
2167     /// Original operand of the instruction.
2168     Value *Origin;
2169 
2170     /// Index of the modified instruction.
2171     unsigned Idx;
2172 
2173   public:
2174     /// Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal.
2175     OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal)
2176         : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) {
2177       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n"
2178                         << "for:" << *Inst << "\n"
2179                         << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n");
2180       Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx);
2181       Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal);
2182     }
2183 
2184     /// Restore the original value of the instruction.
2185     void undo() override {
2186       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n"
2187                         << "for: " << *Inst << "\n"
2188                         << "with: " << *Origin << "\n");
2189       Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin);
2190     }
2191   };
2192 
2193   /// Hide the operands of an instruction.
2194   /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands.
2195   class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction {
2196     /// The list of original operands.
2197     SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues;
2198 
2199   public:
2200     /// Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst.
2201     OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2202       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2203       unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands();
2204       OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds);
2205       for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) {
2206         // Save the current operand.
2207         Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It);
2208         OriginalValues.push_back(Val);
2209         // Set a dummy one.
2210         // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead
2211         // that we are not willing to pay.
2212         Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType()));
2213       }
2214     }
2215 
2216     /// Restore the original list of uses.
2217     void undo() override {
2218       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2219       for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It)
2220         Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]);
2221     }
2222   };
2223 
2224   /// Build a truncate instruction.
2225   class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
2226     Value *Val;
2227 
2228   public:
2229     /// Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2230     /// result.
2231     /// trunc Opnd to Ty.
2232     TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) {
2233       IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd);
2234       Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2235       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2236     }
2237 
2238     /// Get the built value.
2239     Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
2240 
2241     /// Remove the built instruction.
2242     void undo() override {
2243       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2244       if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2245         IVal->eraseFromParent();
2246     }
2247   };
2248 
2249   /// Build a sign extension instruction.
2250   class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
2251     Value *Val;
2252 
2253   public:
2254     /// Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2255     /// result.
2256     /// sext Opnd to Ty.
2257     SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
2258         : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
2259       IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
2260       Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2261       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2262     }
2263 
2264     /// Get the built value.
2265     Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
2266 
2267     /// Remove the built instruction.
2268     void undo() override {
2269       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2270       if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2271         IVal->eraseFromParent();
2272     }
2273   };
2274 
2275   /// Build a zero extension instruction.
2276   class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
2277     Value *Val;
2278 
2279   public:
2280     /// Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2281     /// result.
2282     /// zext Opnd to Ty.
2283     ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
2284         : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
2285       IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
2286       Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2287       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2288     }
2289 
2290     /// Get the built value.
2291     Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
2292 
2293     /// Remove the built instruction.
2294     void undo() override {
2295       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2296       if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2297         IVal->eraseFromParent();
2298     }
2299   };
2300 
2301   /// Mutate an instruction to another type.
2302   class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction {
2303     /// Record the original type.
2304     Type *OrigTy;
2305 
2306   public:
2307     /// Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy.
2308     TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy)
2309         : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) {
2310       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy
2311                         << "\n");
2312       Inst->mutateType(NewTy);
2313     }
2314 
2315     /// Mutate the instruction back to its original type.
2316     void undo() override {
2317       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy
2318                         << "\n");
2319       Inst->mutateType(OrigTy);
2320     }
2321   };
2322 
2323   /// Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction.
2324   class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction {
2325     /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses.
2326     struct InstructionAndIdx {
2327       /// The instruction using the instruction.
2328       Instruction *Inst;
2329 
2330       /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst.
2331       unsigned Idx;
2332 
2333       InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx)
2334           : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {}
2335     };
2336 
2337     /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index).
2338     SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses;
2339 
2340     using use_iterator = SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator;
2341 
2342   public:
2343     /// Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New.
2344     UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2345       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New
2346                         << "\n");
2347       // Record the original uses.
2348       for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) {
2349         Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
2350         OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo()));
2351       }
2352       // Now, we can replace the uses.
2353       Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New);
2354     }
2355 
2356     /// Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst.
2357     void undo() override {
2358       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n");
2359       for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(),
2360                         EndIt = OriginalUses.end();
2361            UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) {
2362         UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst);
2363       }
2364     }
2365   };
2366 
2367   /// Remove an instruction from the IR.
2368   class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction {
2369     /// Original position of the instruction.
2370     InsertionHandler Inserter;
2371 
2372     /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other
2373     /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed.
2374     OperandsHider Hider;
2375 
2376     /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any.
2377     UsesReplacer *Replacer = nullptr;
2378 
2379     /// Keep track of instructions removed.
2380     SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
2381 
2382   public:
2383     /// Remove all reference of \p Inst and optionally replace all its
2384     /// uses with New.
2385     /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action.
2386     /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr
2387     InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts,
2388                        Value *New = nullptr)
2389         : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst),
2390           RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {
2391       if (New)
2392         Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New);
2393       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
2394       RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
2395       /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing
2396       /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the
2397       /// removed instructions during promotion.
2398       Inst->removeFromParent();
2399     }
2400 
2401     ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; }
2402 
2403     /// Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if
2404     /// new value was provided when build this action.
2405     void undo() override {
2406       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
2407       Inserter.insert(Inst);
2408       if (Replacer)
2409         Replacer->undo();
2410       Hider.undo();
2411       RemovedInsts.erase(Inst);
2412     }
2413   };
2414 
2415 public:
2416   /// Restoration point.
2417   /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator
2418   /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer.
2419   using ConstRestorationPt = const TypePromotionAction *;
2420 
2421   TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts)
2422       : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {}
2423 
2424   /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction.
2425   void commit();
2426 
2427   /// Undo all the changes made after the given point.
2428   void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point);
2429 
2430   /// Get the current restoration point.
2431   ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const;
2432 
2433   /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback.
2434   /// @{
2435   /// Same as Instruction::setOperand.
2436   void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal);
2437 
2438   /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent.
2439   void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr);
2440 
2441   /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith.
2442   void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New);
2443 
2444   /// Same as Value::mutateType.
2445   void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy);
2446 
2447   /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc.
2448   Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty);
2449 
2450   /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt.
2451   Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
2452 
2453   /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt.
2454   Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
2455 
2456   /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore.
2457   void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before);
2458   /// @}
2459 
2460 private:
2461   /// The ordered list of actions made so far.
2462   SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions;
2463 
2464   using CommitPt = SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator;
2465 
2466   SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
2467 };
2468 
2469 } // end anonymous namespace
2470 
2471 void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx,
2472                                           Value *NewVal) {
2473   Actions.push_back(llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>(
2474       Inst, Idx, NewVal));
2475 }
2476 
2477 void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst,
2478                                                 Value *NewVal) {
2479   Actions.push_back(
2480       llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>(
2481           Inst, RemovedInsts, NewVal));
2482 }
2483 
2484 void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst,
2485                                                   Value *New) {
2486   Actions.push_back(
2487       llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New));
2488 }
2489 
2490 void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) {
2491   Actions.push_back(
2492       llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy));
2493 }
2494 
2495 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd,
2496                                              Type *Ty) {
2497   std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty));
2498   Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
2499   Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
2500   return Val;
2501 }
2502 
2503 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst,
2504                                             Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
2505   std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
2506   Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
2507   Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
2508   return Val;
2509 }
2510 
2511 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst,
2512                                             Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
2513   std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
2514   Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
2515   Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
2516   return Val;
2517 }
2518 
2519 void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst,
2520                                           Instruction *Before) {
2521   Actions.push_back(
2522       llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>(
2523           Inst, Before));
2524 }
2525 
2526 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt
2527 TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const {
2528   return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr;
2529 }
2530 
2531 void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() {
2532   for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt;
2533        ++It)
2534     (*It)->commit();
2535   Actions.clear();
2536 }
2537 
2538 void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback(
2539     TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) {
2540   while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) {
2541     std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val();
2542     Curr->undo();
2543   }
2544 }
2545 
2546 namespace {
2547 
2548 /// A helper class for matching addressing modes.
2549 ///
2550 /// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes.
2551 class AddressingModeMatcher {
2552   SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts;
2553   const TargetLowering &TLI;
2554   const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI;
2555   const DataLayout &DL;
2556 
2557   /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and
2558   /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for.
2559   Type *AccessTy;
2560   unsigned AddrSpace;
2561   Instruction *MemoryInst;
2562 
2563   /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is
2564   /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff.
2565   ExtAddrMode &AddrMode;
2566 
2567   /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations.
2568   const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts;
2569 
2570   /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion.
2571   InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts;
2572 
2573   /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
2574   TypePromotionTransaction &TPT;
2575 
2576   // A GEP which has too large offset to be folded into the addressing mode.
2577   std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP;
2578 
2579   /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks.
2580   /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true.
2581   bool IgnoreProfitability;
2582 
2583   AddressingModeMatcher(
2584       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI, const TargetLowering &TLI,
2585       const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, Type *AT, unsigned AS, Instruction *MI,
2586       ExtAddrMode &AM, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
2587       InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2588       std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP)
2589       : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI),
2590         DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS),
2591         MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts),
2592         PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT), LargeOffsetGEP(LargeOffsetGEP) {
2593     IgnoreProfitability = false;
2594   }
2595 
2596 public:
2597   /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold,
2598   /// give an access type of AccessTy.  This returns a list of involved
2599   /// instructions in AddrModeInsts.
2600   /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare
2601   /// optimizations.
2602   /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
2603   /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
2604   static ExtAddrMode
2605   Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS, Instruction *MemoryInst,
2606         SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AddrModeInsts,
2607         const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI,
2608         const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2609         TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2610         std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) {
2611     ExtAddrMode Result;
2612 
2613     bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AccessTy, AS,
2614                                          MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
2615                                          PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP)
2616                        .matchAddr(V, 0);
2617     (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
2618     return Result;
2619   }
2620 
2621 private:
2622   bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth);
2623   bool matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth);
2624   bool matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth,
2625                           bool *MovedAway = nullptr);
2626   bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I,
2627                                             ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
2628                                             ExtAddrMode &AMAfter);
2629   bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2);
2630   bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost,
2631                              Value *PromotedOperand) const;
2632 };
2633 
2634 /// Keep track of simplification of Phi nodes.
2635 /// Accept the set of all phi nodes and erase phi node from this set
2636 /// if it is simplified.
2637 class SimplificationTracker {
2638   DenseMap<Value *, Value *> Storage;
2639   const SimplifyQuery &SQ;
2640   // Tracks newly created Phi nodes. We use a SetVector to get deterministic
2641   // order when iterating over the set in MatchPhiSet.
2642   SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> AllPhiNodes;
2643   // Tracks newly created Select nodes.
2644   SmallPtrSet<SelectInst *, 32> AllSelectNodes;
2645 
2646 public:
2647   SimplificationTracker(const SimplifyQuery &sq)
2648       : SQ(sq) {}
2649 
2650   Value *Get(Value *V) {
2651     do {
2652       auto SV = Storage.find(V);
2653       if (SV == Storage.end())
2654         return V;
2655       V = SV->second;
2656     } while (true);
2657   }
2658 
2659   Value *Simplify(Value *Val) {
2660     SmallVector<Value *, 32> WorkList;
2661     SmallPtrSet<Value *, 32> Visited;
2662     WorkList.push_back(Val);
2663     while (!WorkList.empty()) {
2664       auto P = WorkList.pop_back_val();
2665       if (!Visited.insert(P).second)
2666         continue;
2667       if (auto *PI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(P))
2668         if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(cast<Instruction>(PI), SQ)) {
2669           for (auto *U : PI->users())
2670             WorkList.push_back(cast<Value>(U));
2671           Put(PI, V);
2672           PI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2673           if (auto *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(PI))
2674             AllPhiNodes.remove(PHI);
2675           if (auto *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(PI))
2676             AllSelectNodes.erase(Select);
2677           PI->eraseFromParent();
2678         }
2679     }
2680     return Get(Val);
2681   }
2682 
2683   void Put(Value *From, Value *To) {
2684     Storage.insert({ From, To });
2685   }
2686 
2687   void ReplacePhi(PHINode *From, PHINode *To) {
2688     Value* OldReplacement = Get(From);
2689     while (OldReplacement != From) {
2690       From = To;
2691       To = dyn_cast<PHINode>(OldReplacement);
2692       OldReplacement = Get(From);
2693     }
2694     assert(Get(To) == To && "Replacement PHI node is already replaced.");
2695     Put(From, To);
2696     From->replaceAllUsesWith(To);
2697     AllPhiNodes.remove(From);
2698     From->eraseFromParent();
2699   }
2700 
2701   SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32>& newPhiNodes() { return AllPhiNodes; }
2702 
2703   void insertNewPhi(PHINode *PN) { AllPhiNodes.insert(PN); }
2704 
2705   void insertNewSelect(SelectInst *SI) { AllSelectNodes.insert(SI); }
2706 
2707   unsigned countNewPhiNodes() const { return AllPhiNodes.size(); }
2708 
2709   unsigned countNewSelectNodes() const { return AllSelectNodes.size(); }
2710 
2711   void destroyNewNodes(Type *CommonType) {
2712     // For safe erasing, replace the uses with dummy value first.
2713     auto Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType);
2714     for (auto I : AllPhiNodes) {
2715       I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy);
2716       I->eraseFromParent();
2717     }
2718     AllPhiNodes.clear();
2719     for (auto I : AllSelectNodes) {
2720       I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy);
2721       I->eraseFromParent();
2722     }
2723     AllSelectNodes.clear();
2724   }
2725 };
2726 
2727 /// A helper class for combining addressing modes.
2728 class AddressingModeCombiner {
2729   typedef std::pair<Value *, BasicBlock *> ValueInBB;
2730   typedef DenseMap<ValueInBB, Value *> FoldAddrToValueMapping;
2731   typedef std::pair<PHINode *, PHINode *> PHIPair;
2732 
2733 private:
2734   /// The addressing modes we've collected.
2735   SmallVector<ExtAddrMode, 16> AddrModes;
2736 
2737   /// The field in which the AddrModes differ, when we have more than one.
2738   ExtAddrMode::FieldName DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::NoField;
2739 
2740   /// Are the AddrModes that we have all just equal to their original values?
2741   bool AllAddrModesTrivial = true;
2742 
2743   /// Common Type for all different fields in addressing modes.
2744   Type *CommonType;
2745 
2746   /// SimplifyQuery for simplifyInstruction utility.
2747   const SimplifyQuery &SQ;
2748 
2749   /// Original Address.
2750   ValueInBB Original;
2751 
2752 public:
2753   AddressingModeCombiner(const SimplifyQuery &_SQ, ValueInBB OriginalValue)
2754       : CommonType(nullptr), SQ(_SQ), Original(OriginalValue) {}
2755 
2756   /// Get the combined AddrMode
2757   const ExtAddrMode &getAddrMode() const {
2758     return AddrModes[0];
2759   }
2760 
2761   /// Add a new AddrMode if it's compatible with the AddrModes we already
2762   /// have.
2763   /// \return True iff we succeeded in doing so.
2764   bool addNewAddrMode(ExtAddrMode &NewAddrMode) {
2765     // Take note of if we have any non-trivial AddrModes, as we need to detect
2766     // when all AddrModes are trivial as then we would introduce a phi or select
2767     // which just duplicates what's already there.
2768     AllAddrModesTrivial = AllAddrModesTrivial && NewAddrMode.isTrivial();
2769 
2770     // If this is the first addrmode then everything is fine.
2771     if (AddrModes.empty()) {
2772       AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode);
2773       return true;
2774     }
2775 
2776     // Figure out how different this is from the other address modes, which we
2777     // can do just by comparing against the first one given that we only care
2778     // about the cumulative difference.
2779     ExtAddrMode::FieldName ThisDifferentField =
2780       AddrModes[0].compare(NewAddrMode);
2781     if (DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField)
2782       DifferentField = ThisDifferentField;
2783     else if (DifferentField != ThisDifferentField)
2784       DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields;
2785 
2786     // If NewAddrMode differs in more than one dimension we cannot handle it.
2787     bool CanHandle = DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields;
2788 
2789     // If Scale Field is different then we reject.
2790     CanHandle = CanHandle && DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::ScaleField;
2791 
2792     // We also must reject the case when base offset is different and
2793     // scale reg is not null, we cannot handle this case due to merge of
2794     // different offsets will be used as ScaleReg.
2795     CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField ||
2796                               !NewAddrMode.ScaledReg);
2797 
2798     // We also must reject the case when GV is different and BaseReg installed
2799     // due to we want to use base reg as a merge of GV values.
2800     CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField ||
2801                               !NewAddrMode.HasBaseReg);
2802 
2803     // Even if NewAddMode is the same we still need to collect it due to
2804     // original value is different. And later we will need all original values
2805     // as anchors during finding the common Phi node.
2806     if (CanHandle)
2807       AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode);
2808     else
2809       AddrModes.clear();
2810 
2811     return CanHandle;
2812   }
2813 
2814   /// Combine the addressing modes we've collected into a single
2815   /// addressing mode.
2816   /// \return True iff we successfully combined them or we only had one so
2817   /// didn't need to combine them anyway.
2818   bool combineAddrModes() {
2819     // If we have no AddrModes then they can't be combined.
2820     if (AddrModes.size() == 0)
2821       return false;
2822 
2823     // A single AddrMode can trivially be combined.
2824     if (AddrModes.size() == 1 || DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField)
2825       return true;
2826 
2827     // If the AddrModes we collected are all just equal to the value they are
2828     // derived from then combining them wouldn't do anything useful.
2829     if (AllAddrModesTrivial)
2830       return false;
2831 
2832     if (!addrModeCombiningAllowed())
2833       return false;
2834 
2835     // Build a map between <original value, basic block where we saw it> to
2836     // value of base register.
2837     // Bail out if there is no common type.
2838     FoldAddrToValueMapping Map;
2839     if (!initializeMap(Map))
2840       return false;
2841 
2842     Value *CommonValue = findCommon(Map);
2843     if (CommonValue)
2844       AddrModes[0].SetCombinedField(DifferentField, CommonValue, AddrModes);
2845     return CommonValue != nullptr;
2846   }
2847 
2848 private:
2849   /// Initialize Map with anchor values. For address seen in some BB
2850   /// we set the value of different field saw in this address.
2851   /// If address is not an instruction than basic block is set to null.
2852   /// At the same time we find a common type for different field we will
2853   /// use to create new Phi/Select nodes. Keep it in CommonType field.
2854   /// Return false if there is no common type found.
2855   bool initializeMap(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) {
2856     // Keep track of keys where the value is null. We will need to replace it
2857     // with constant null when we know the common type.
2858     SmallVector<ValueInBB, 2> NullValue;
2859     Type *IntPtrTy = SQ.DL.getIntPtrType(AddrModes[0].OriginalValue->getType());
2860     for (auto &AM : AddrModes) {
2861       BasicBlock *BB = nullptr;
2862       if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AM.OriginalValue))
2863         BB = I->getParent();
2864 
2865       Value *DV = AM.GetFieldAsValue(DifferentField, IntPtrTy);
2866       if (DV) {
2867         auto *Type = DV->getType();
2868         if (CommonType && CommonType != Type)
2869           return false;
2870         CommonType = Type;
2871         Map[{ AM.OriginalValue, BB }] = DV;
2872       } else {
2873         NullValue.push_back({ AM.OriginalValue, BB });
2874       }
2875     }
2876     assert(CommonType && "At least one non-null value must be!");
2877     for (auto VIBB : NullValue)
2878       Map[VIBB] = Constant::getNullValue(CommonType);
2879     return true;
2880   }
2881 
2882   /// We have mapping between value A and basic block where value A
2883   /// seen to other value B where B was a field in addressing mode represented
2884   /// by A. Also we have an original value C representing an address in some
2885   /// basic block. Traversing from C through phi and selects we ended up with
2886   /// A's in a map. This utility function tries to find a value V which is a
2887   /// field in addressing mode C and traversing through phi nodes and selects
2888   /// we will end up in corresponded values B in a map.
2889   /// The utility will create a new Phi/Selects if needed.
2890   // The simple example looks as follows:
2891   // BB1:
2892   //   p1 = b1 + 40
2893   //   br cond BB2, BB3
2894   // BB2:
2895   //   p2 = b2 + 40
2896   //   br BB3
2897   // BB3:
2898   //   p = phi [p1, BB1], [p2, BB2]
2899   //   v = load p
2900   // Map is
2901   //   <p1, BB1> -> b1
2902   //   <p2, BB2> -> b2
2903   // Request is
2904   //   <p, BB3> -> ?
2905   // The function tries to find or build phi [b1, BB1], [b2, BB2] in BB3
2906   Value *findCommon(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) {
2907     // Tracks the simplification of newly created phi nodes. The reason we use
2908     // this mapping is because we will add new created Phi nodes in AddrToBase.
2909     // Simplification of Phi nodes is recursive, so some Phi node may
2910     // be simplified after we added it to AddrToBase.
2911     // Using this mapping we can find the current value in AddrToBase.
2912     SimplificationTracker ST(SQ);
2913 
2914     // First step, DFS to create PHI nodes for all intermediate blocks.
2915     // Also fill traverse order for the second step.
2916     SmallVector<ValueInBB, 32> TraverseOrder;
2917     InsertPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST);
2918 
2919     // Second Step, fill new nodes by merged values and simplify if possible.
2920     FillPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST);
2921 
2922     if (!AddrSinkNewSelects && ST.countNewSelectNodes() > 0) {
2923       ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType);
2924       return nullptr;
2925     }
2926 
2927     // Now we'd like to match New Phi nodes to existed ones.
2928     unsigned PhiNotMatchedCount = 0;
2929     if (!MatchPhiSet(ST, AddrSinkNewPhis, PhiNotMatchedCount)) {
2930       ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType);
2931       return nullptr;
2932     }
2933 
2934     auto *Result = ST.Get(Map.find(Original)->second);
2935     if (Result) {
2936       NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated += ST.countNewPhiNodes() + PhiNotMatchedCount;
2937       NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated += ST.countNewSelectNodes();
2938     }
2939     return Result;
2940   }
2941 
2942   /// Try to match PHI node to Candidate.
2943   /// Matcher tracks the matched Phi nodes.
2944   bool MatchPhiNode(PHINode *PHI, PHINode *Candidate,
2945                     SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> &Matcher,
2946                     SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> &PhiNodesToMatch) {
2947     SmallVector<PHIPair, 8> WorkList;
2948     Matcher.insert({ PHI, Candidate });
2949     WorkList.push_back({ PHI, Candidate });
2950     SmallSet<PHIPair, 8> Visited;
2951     while (!WorkList.empty()) {
2952       auto Item = WorkList.pop_back_val();
2953       if (!Visited.insert(Item).second)
2954         continue;
2955       // We iterate over all incoming values to Phi to compare them.
2956       // If values are different and both of them Phi and the first one is a
2957       // Phi we added (subject to match) and both of them is in the same basic
2958       // block then we can match our pair if values match. So we state that
2959       // these values match and add it to work list to verify that.
2960       for (auto B : Item.first->blocks()) {
2961         Value *FirstValue = Item.first->getIncomingValueForBlock(B);
2962         Value *SecondValue = Item.second->getIncomingValueForBlock(B);
2963         if (FirstValue == SecondValue)
2964           continue;
2965 
2966         PHINode *FirstPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(FirstValue);
2967         PHINode *SecondPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SecondValue);
2968 
2969         // One of them is not Phi or
2970         // The first one is not Phi node from the set we'd like to match or
2971         // Phi nodes from different basic blocks then
2972         // we will not be able to match.
2973         if (!FirstPhi || !SecondPhi || !PhiNodesToMatch.count(FirstPhi) ||
2974             FirstPhi->getParent() != SecondPhi->getParent())
2975           return false;
2976 
2977         // If we already matched them then continue.
2978         if (Matcher.count({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }))
2979           continue;
2980         // So the values are different and does not match. So we need them to
2981         // match.
2982         Matcher.insert({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi });
2983         // But me must check it.
2984         WorkList.push_back({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi });
2985       }
2986     }
2987     return true;
2988   }
2989 
2990   /// For the given set of PHI nodes (in the SimplificationTracker) try
2991   /// to find their equivalents.
2992   /// Returns false if this matching fails and creation of new Phi is disabled.
2993   bool MatchPhiSet(SimplificationTracker &ST, bool AllowNewPhiNodes,
2994                    unsigned &PhiNotMatchedCount) {
2995     // Use a SetVector for Matched to make sure we do replacements (ReplacePhi)
2996     // in a deterministic order below.
2997     SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> Matched;
2998     SmallPtrSet<PHINode *, 8> WillNotMatch;
2999     SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> &PhiNodesToMatch = ST.newPhiNodes();
3000     while (PhiNodesToMatch.size()) {
3001       PHINode *PHI = *PhiNodesToMatch.begin();
3002 
3003       // Add us, if no Phi nodes in the basic block we do not match.
3004       WillNotMatch.clear();
3005       WillNotMatch.insert(PHI);
3006 
3007       // Traverse all Phis until we found equivalent or fail to do that.
3008       bool IsMatched = false;
3009       for (auto &P : PHI->getParent()->phis()) {
3010         if (&P == PHI)
3011           continue;
3012         if ((IsMatched = MatchPhiNode(PHI, &P, Matched, PhiNodesToMatch)))
3013           break;
3014         // If it does not match, collect all Phi nodes from matcher.
3015         // if we end up with no match, them all these Phi nodes will not match
3016         // later.
3017         for (auto M : Matched)
3018           WillNotMatch.insert(M.first);
3019         Matched.clear();
3020       }
3021       if (IsMatched) {
3022         // Replace all matched values and erase them.
3023         for (auto MV : Matched)
3024           ST.ReplacePhi(MV.first, MV.second);
3025         Matched.clear();
3026         continue;
3027       }
3028       // If we are not allowed to create new nodes then bail out.
3029       if (!AllowNewPhiNodes)
3030         return false;
3031       // Just remove all seen values in matcher. They will not match anything.
3032       PhiNotMatchedCount += WillNotMatch.size();
3033       for (auto *P : WillNotMatch)
3034         PhiNodesToMatch.remove(P);
3035     }
3036     return true;
3037   }
3038   /// Fill the placeholder with values from predecessors and simplify it.
3039   void FillPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map,
3040                         SmallVectorImpl<ValueInBB> &TraverseOrder,
3041                         SimplificationTracker &ST) {
3042     while (!TraverseOrder.empty()) {
3043       auto Current = TraverseOrder.pop_back_val();
3044       assert(Map.find(Current) != Map.end() && "No node to fill!!!");
3045       Value *CurrentValue = Current.first;
3046       BasicBlock *CurrentBlock = Current.second;
3047       Value *V = Map[Current];
3048 
3049       if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) {
3050         // CurrentValue also must be Select.
3051         auto *CurrentSelect = cast<SelectInst>(CurrentValue);
3052         auto *TrueValue = CurrentSelect->getTrueValue();
3053         ValueInBB TrueItem = { TrueValue, isa<Instruction>(TrueValue)
3054                                               ? CurrentBlock
3055                                               : nullptr };
3056         assert(Map.find(TrueItem) != Map.end() && "No True Value!");
3057         Select->setTrueValue(ST.Get(Map[TrueItem]));
3058         auto *FalseValue = CurrentSelect->getFalseValue();
3059         ValueInBB FalseItem = { FalseValue, isa<Instruction>(FalseValue)
3060                                                 ? CurrentBlock
3061                                                 : nullptr };
3062         assert(Map.find(FalseItem) != Map.end() && "No False Value!");
3063         Select->setFalseValue(ST.Get(Map[FalseItem]));
3064       } else {
3065         // Must be a Phi node then.
3066         PHINode *PHI = cast<PHINode>(V);
3067         // Fill the Phi node with values from predecessors.
3068         bool IsDefinedInThisBB =
3069             cast<Instruction>(CurrentValue)->getParent() == CurrentBlock;
3070         auto *CurrentPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(CurrentValue);
3071         for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock)) {
3072           Value *PV = IsDefinedInThisBB
3073                           ? CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B)
3074                           : CurrentValue;
3075           ValueInBB item = { PV, isa<Instruction>(PV) ? B : nullptr };
3076           assert(Map.find(item) != Map.end() && "No predecessor Value!");
3077           PHI->addIncoming(ST.Get(Map[item]), B);
3078         }
3079       }
3080       // Simplify if possible.
3081       Map[Current] = ST.Simplify(V);
3082     }
3083   }
3084 
3085   /// Starting from value recursively iterates over predecessors up to known
3086   /// ending values represented in a map. For each traversed block inserts
3087   /// a placeholder Phi or Select.
3088   /// Reports all new created Phi/Select nodes by adding them to set.
3089   /// Also reports and order in what basic blocks have been traversed.
3090   void InsertPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map,
3091                           SmallVectorImpl<ValueInBB> &TraverseOrder,
3092                           SimplificationTracker &ST) {
3093     SmallVector<ValueInBB, 32> Worklist;
3094     assert((isa<PHINode>(Original.first) || isa<SelectInst>(Original.first)) &&
3095            "Address must be a Phi or Select node");
3096     auto *Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType);
3097     Worklist.push_back(Original);
3098     while (!Worklist.empty()) {
3099       auto Current = Worklist.pop_back_val();
3100       // If value is not an instruction it is something global, constant,
3101       // parameter and we can say that this value is observable in any block.
3102       // Set block to null to denote it.
3103       // Also please take into account that it is how we build anchors.
3104       if (!isa<Instruction>(Current.first))
3105         Current.second = nullptr;
3106       // if it is already visited or it is an ending value then skip it.
3107       if (Map.find(Current) != Map.end())
3108         continue;
3109       TraverseOrder.push_back(Current);
3110 
3111       Value *CurrentValue = Current.first;
3112       BasicBlock *CurrentBlock = Current.second;
3113       // CurrentValue must be a Phi node or select. All others must be covered
3114       // by anchors.
3115       Instruction *CurrentI = cast<Instruction>(CurrentValue);
3116       bool IsDefinedInThisBB = CurrentI->getParent() == CurrentBlock;
3117 
3118       unsigned PredCount = pred_size(CurrentBlock);
3119       // if Current Value is not defined in this basic block we are interested
3120       // in values in predecessors.
3121       if (!IsDefinedInThisBB) {
3122         assert(PredCount && "Unreachable block?!");
3123         PHINode *PHI = PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi",
3124                                        &CurrentBlock->front());
3125         Map[Current] = PHI;
3126         ST.insertNewPhi(PHI);
3127         // Add all predecessors in work list.
3128         for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock))
3129           Worklist.push_back({ CurrentValue, B });
3130         continue;
3131       }
3132       // Value is defined in this basic block.
3133       if (SelectInst *OrigSelect = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(CurrentI)) {
3134         // Is it OK to get metadata from OrigSelect?!
3135         // Create a Select placeholder with dummy value.
3136         SelectInst *Select =
3137             SelectInst::Create(OrigSelect->getCondition(), Dummy, Dummy,
3138                                OrigSelect->getName(), OrigSelect, OrigSelect);
3139         Map[Current] = Select;
3140         ST.insertNewSelect(Select);
3141         // We are interested in True and False value in this basic block.
3142         Worklist.push_back({ OrigSelect->getTrueValue(), CurrentBlock });
3143         Worklist.push_back({ OrigSelect->getFalseValue(), CurrentBlock });
3144       } else {
3145         // It must be a Phi node then.
3146         auto *CurrentPhi = cast<PHINode>(CurrentI);
3147         // Create new Phi node for merge of bases.
3148         assert(PredCount && "Unreachable block?!");
3149         PHINode *PHI = PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi",
3150                                        &CurrentBlock->front());
3151         Map[Current] = PHI;
3152         ST.insertNewPhi(PHI);
3153 
3154         // Add all predecessors in work list.
3155         for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock))
3156           Worklist.push_back({ CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B), B });
3157       }
3158     }
3159   }
3160 
3161   bool addrModeCombiningAllowed() {
3162     if (DisableComplexAddrModes)
3163       return false;
3164     switch (DifferentField) {
3165     default:
3166       return false;
3167     case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField:
3168       return AddrSinkCombineBaseReg;
3169     case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField:
3170       return AddrSinkCombineBaseGV;
3171     case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField:
3172       return AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs;
3173     case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField:
3174       return AddrSinkCombineScaledReg;
3175     }
3176   }
3177 };
3178 } // end anonymous namespace
3179 
3180 /// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode.
3181 /// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target,
3182 /// false if not.
3183 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale,
3184                                              unsigned Depth) {
3185   // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing
3186   // mode.  Just process that directly.
3187   if (Scale == 1)
3188     return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth);
3189 
3190   // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this.
3191   if (Scale == 0)
3192     return true;
3193 
3194   // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we
3195   // need an available scale field.
3196   if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg)
3197     return false;
3198 
3199   ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode;
3200 
3201   // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7.  This could also do things like
3202   // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8].
3203   TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale;
3204   TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg;
3205 
3206   // If the new address isn't legal, bail out.
3207   if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
3208     return false;
3209 
3210   // It was legal, so commit it.
3211   AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
3212 
3213   // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode.  Check now
3214   // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C.  If so, we can turn this into adding
3215   // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode.
3216   ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr;
3217   if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) &&  // not a constant expr.
3218       match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) {
3219     TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS;
3220     TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale;
3221 
3222     // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded
3223     // this instruction.
3224     if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
3225       AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg));
3226       AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
3227       return true;
3228     }
3229   }
3230 
3231   // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have.
3232   return true;
3233 }
3234 
3235 /// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation
3236 /// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it.
3237 /// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least
3238 /// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can.
3239 static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) {
3240   switch (I->getOpcode()) {
3241   case Instruction::BitCast:
3242   case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
3243     // Don't touch identity bitcasts.
3244     if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType())
3245       return false;
3246     return I->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy();
3247   case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3248     // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
3249     return true;
3250   case Instruction::IntToPtr:
3251     // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable.
3252     return true;
3253   case Instruction::Add:
3254     return true;
3255   case Instruction::Mul:
3256   case Instruction::Shl:
3257     // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3258     return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
3259   case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
3260     return true;
3261   default:
3262     return false;
3263   }
3264 }
3265 
3266 /// Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI.
3267 /// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion.
3268 /// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed
3269 /// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state.
3270 static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI,
3271                                        const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) {
3272   Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val);
3273   if (!PromotedInst)
3274     return false;
3275   int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode());
3276   // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion.
3277   if (!ISDOpcode)
3278     return true;
3279   // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not.
3280   return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
3281       ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType()));
3282 }
3283 
3284 namespace {
3285 
3286 /// Hepler class to perform type promotion.
3287 class TypePromotionHelper {
3288   /// Utility function to add a promoted instruction \p ExtOpnd to
3289   /// \p PromotedInsts and record the type of extension we have seen.
3290   static void addPromotedInst(InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3291                               Instruction *ExtOpnd,
3292                               bool IsSExt) {
3293     ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension;
3294     InstrToOrigTy::iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(ExtOpnd);
3295     if (It != PromotedInsts.end()) {
3296       // If the new extension is same as original, the information in
3297       // PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] is still correct.
3298       if (It->second.getInt() == ExtTy)
3299         return;
3300 
3301       // Now the new extension is different from old extension, we make
3302       // the type information invalid by setting extension type to
3303       // BothExtension.
3304       ExtTy = BothExtension;
3305     }
3306     PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] = TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), ExtTy);
3307   }
3308 
3309   /// Utility function to query the original type of instruction \p Opnd
3310   /// with a matched extension type. If the extension doesn't match, we
3311   /// cannot use the information we had on the original type.
3312   /// BothExtension doesn't match any extension type.
3313   static const Type *getOrigType(const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3314                                  Instruction *Opnd,
3315                                  bool IsSExt) {
3316     ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension;
3317     InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd);
3318     if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == ExtTy)
3319       return It->second.getPointer();
3320     return nullptr;
3321   }
3322 
3323   /// Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension
3324   /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by
3325   /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst.
3326   /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt.
3327   /// In other words, check if:
3328   /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType.
3329   /// #1 Promotion applies:
3330   /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...).
3331   /// #2 Operand reuses:
3332   /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType.
3333   /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3334   static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType,
3335                             const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt);
3336 
3337   /// Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when
3338   /// promoting \p Inst.
3339   static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) {
3340     return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0);
3341   }
3342 
3343   /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
3344   /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext.
3345   /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3346   /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions
3347   /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
3348   /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3349   /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
3350   /// Should never be called directly.
3351   /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
3352   static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
3353       Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3354       InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3355       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3356       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI);
3357 
3358   /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
3359   /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext.
3360   /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3361   /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions
3362   /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
3363   /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3364   /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
3365   /// Should never be called directly.
3366   /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
3367   static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext,
3368                                        TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3369                                        InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3370                                        unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3371                                        SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3372                                        SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3373                                        const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt);
3374 
3375   /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
3376   static Value *signExtendOperandForOther(
3377       Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3378       InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3379       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3380       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3381     return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3382                                   Exts, Truncs, TLI, true);
3383   }
3384 
3385   /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
3386   static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther(
3387       Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3388       InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3389       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3390       SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3391     return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3392                                   Exts, Truncs, TLI, false);
3393   }
3394 
3395 public:
3396   /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext.
3397   using Action = Value *(*)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3398                             InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3399                             unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3400                             SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3401                             SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3402                             const TargetLowering &TLI);
3403 
3404   /// Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the appropriate
3405   /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext.
3406   /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current
3407   /// sign extension.
3408   /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the
3409   /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important
3410   /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare
3411   /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove.
3412   /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3413   static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
3414                           const TargetLowering &TLI,
3415                           const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts);
3416 };
3417 
3418 } // end anonymous namespace
3419 
3420 bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst,
3421                                         Type *ConsideredExtType,
3422                                         const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3423                                         bool IsSExt) {
3424   // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet.
3425   // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we
3426   // statically extend, e.g., constants and such.
3427   if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy())
3428     return false;
3429 
3430   // We can always get through zext.
3431   if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
3432     return true;
3433 
3434   // sext(sext) is ok too.
3435   if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst))
3436     return true;
3437 
3438   // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the
3439   // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag.
3440   const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst);
3441   if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) &&
3442       ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) ||
3443        (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap())))
3444     return true;
3445 
3446   // ext(and(opnd, cst)) --> and(ext(opnd), ext(cst))
3447   if ((Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And ||
3448        Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or))
3449     return true;
3450 
3451   // ext(xor(opnd, cst)) --> xor(ext(opnd), ext(cst))
3452   if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Xor) {
3453     const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Inst->getOperand(1));
3454     // Make sure it is not a NOT.
3455     if (Cst && !Cst->getValue().isAllOnesValue())
3456       return true;
3457   }
3458 
3459   // zext(shrl(opnd, cst)) --> shrl(zext(opnd), zext(cst))
3460   // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like
3461   //     zext i32 (shrl i8 %val, 12)  -->  shrl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12
3462   //          poisoned value                    regular value
3463   // It should be OK since undef covers valid value.
3464   if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr && !IsSExt)
3465     return true;
3466 
3467   // and(ext(shl(opnd, cst)), cst) --> and(shl(ext(opnd), ext(cst)), cst)
3468   // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like
3469   //     zext i32 (shl i8 %val, 12)  -->  shl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12
3470   //          poisoned value                    regular value
3471   // It should be OK since undef covers valid value.
3472   if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl && Inst->hasOneUse()) {
3473     const Instruction *ExtInst =
3474         dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
3475     if (ExtInst->hasOneUse()) {
3476       const Instruction *AndInst =
3477           dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*ExtInst->user_begin());
3478       if (AndInst && AndInst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) {
3479         const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AndInst->getOperand(1));
3480         if (Cst &&
3481             Cst->getValue().isIntN(Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth()))
3482           return true;
3483       }
3484     }
3485   }
3486 
3487   // Check if we can do the following simplification.
3488   // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd)
3489   if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst))
3490     return false;
3491 
3492   Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0);
3493   // Check if we can use this operand in the extension.
3494   // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot.
3495   if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
3496       OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
3497           ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth())
3498     return false;
3499 
3500   // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have
3501   // any information on the dropped bits.
3502   // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic).
3503   Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal);
3504   if (!Opnd)
3505     return false;
3506 
3507   // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough.
3508   // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of
3509   // the extension.
3510   // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits.
3511   const Type *OpndType = getOrigType(PromotedInsts, Opnd, IsSExt);
3512   if (OpndType)
3513     ;
3514   else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd)))
3515     OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType();
3516   else
3517     return false;
3518 
3519   // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits.
3520   return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >=
3521          OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth();
3522 }
3523 
3524 TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
3525     Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
3526     const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) {
3527   assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) &&
3528          "Unexpected instruction type");
3529   Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
3530   Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType();
3531   bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext);
3532   // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot
3533   // get through.
3534   // If it, check we can get through.
3535   if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt))
3536     return nullptr;
3537 
3538   // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare.
3539   // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be
3540   // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop.
3541   if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd))
3542     return nullptr;
3543 
3544   // SExt or Trunc instructions.
3545   // Return the related handler.
3546   if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) ||
3547       isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd))
3548     return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt;
3549 
3550   // Regular instruction.
3551   // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions.
3552   if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType()))
3553     return nullptr;
3554   return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther;
3555 }
3556 
3557 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
3558     Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3559     InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3560     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3561     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3562   // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
3563   // get through it and this method should not be called.
3564   Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0));
3565   Value *ExtVal = SExt;
3566   bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false;
3567   if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) {
3568     // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd))
3569     // => zext(opnd).
3570     HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd);
3571     Value *ZExt =
3572         TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType());
3573     TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt);
3574     TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt);
3575     ExtVal = ZExt;
3576   } else {
3577     // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd))
3578     // => z|sext(opnd).
3579     TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0));
3580   }
3581   CreatedInstsCost = 0;
3582 
3583   // Remove dead code.
3584   if (SExtOpnd->use_empty())
3585     TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd);
3586 
3587   // Check if the extension is still needed.
3588   Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal);
3589   if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) {
3590     if (ExtInst) {
3591       if (Exts)
3592         Exts->push_back(ExtInst);
3593       CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt;
3594     }
3595     return ExtVal;
3596   }
3597 
3598   // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty.
3599   // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst.
3600   Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0);
3601   TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal);
3602   return NextVal;
3603 }
3604 
3605 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther(
3606     Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3607     InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3608     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3609     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI,
3610     bool IsSExt) {
3611   // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
3612   // get through it and this method should not be called.
3613   Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
3614   CreatedInstsCost = 0;
3615   if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) {
3616     // ExtOpnd will be promoted.
3617     // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the
3618     // promoted version.
3619     // Create the truncate now.
3620     Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType());
3621     if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) {
3622       // Insert it just after the definition.
3623       ITrunc->moveAfter(ExtOpnd);
3624       if (Truncs)
3625         Truncs->push_back(ITrunc);
3626     }
3627 
3628     TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc);
3629     // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call
3630     // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext.
3631     TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd);
3632   }
3633 
3634   // Get through the Instruction:
3635   // 1. Update its type.
3636   // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst.
3637   // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended.
3638 
3639   // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion.
3640   // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits.
3641   addPromotedInst(PromotedInsts, ExtOpnd, IsSExt);
3642   // Step #1.
3643   TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType());
3644   // Step #2.
3645   TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd);
3646   // Step #3.
3647   Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext;
3648 
3649   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n");
3650   for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx;
3651        ++OpIdx) {
3652     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n');
3653     if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() ||
3654         !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) {
3655       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n");
3656       continue;
3657     }
3658     // Check if we can statically extend the operand.
3659     Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx);
3660     if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) {
3661       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3662       unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
3663       APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth)
3664                             : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth);
3665       TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal));
3666       continue;
3667     }
3668     // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them.
3669     if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) {
3670       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3671       TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType()));
3672       continue;
3673     }
3674 
3675     // Otherwise we have to explicitly sign extend the operand.
3676     // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand.
3677     if (!ExtForOpnd) {
3678       // If yes, create a new one.
3679       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n");
3680       Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType())
3681         : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType());
3682       if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) {
3683         TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd);
3684         continue;
3685       }
3686       ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd);
3687     }
3688     if (Exts)
3689       Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd);
3690     TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd);
3691 
3692     // Move the sign extension before the insertion point.
3693     TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd);
3694     TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd);
3695     CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd);
3696     // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created.
3697     ExtForOpnd = nullptr;
3698   }
3699   if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) {
3700     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n");
3701     TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext);
3702   }
3703   return ExtOpnd;
3704 }
3705 
3706 /// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable.
3707 /// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the
3708 /// promotion.
3709 /// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion
3710 /// plus the number of instructions that have been
3711 /// matched in the addressing mode the promotion.
3712 /// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted.
3713 /// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise.
3714 bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable(
3715     unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const {
3716   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost
3717                     << '\n');
3718   // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the
3719   // old extension plus what we folded.
3720   // This is not profitable.
3721   if (NewCost > OldCost)
3722     return false;
3723   if (NewCost < OldCost)
3724     return true;
3725   // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in
3726   // loads for instance.
3727   // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction.
3728   return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand);
3729 }
3730 
3731 /// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation
3732 /// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return
3733 /// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode.
3734 /// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or
3735 /// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success.
3736 /// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing
3737 /// because it has been moved away.
3738 /// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions.
3739 /// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away.
3740 /// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must
3741 /// not be referenced anymore.
3742 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode,
3743                                                unsigned Depth,
3744                                                bool *MovedAway) {
3745   // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees.
3746   if (Depth >= 5) return false;
3747 
3748   // By default, all matched instructions stay in place.
3749   if (MovedAway)
3750     *MovedAway = false;
3751 
3752   switch (Opcode) {
3753   case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3754     // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
3755     return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
3756   case Instruction::IntToPtr: {
3757     auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3758     auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS));
3759     // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized.
3760     if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy)
3761       return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
3762     return false;
3763   }
3764   case Instruction::BitCast:
3765     // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is
3766     // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something).
3767     if (AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy() &&
3768         // Don't touch identity bitcasts.  These were probably put here by LSR,
3769         // and we don't want to mess around with them.  Assume it knows what it
3770         // is doing.
3771         AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType())
3772       return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
3773     return false;
3774   case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: {
3775     unsigned SrcAS
3776       = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3777     unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3778     if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS))
3779       return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
3780     return false;
3781   }
3782   case Instruction::Add: {
3783     // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS.  If so, we win.
3784     ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3785     unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3786     // Start a transaction at this point.
3787     // The LHS may match but not the RHS.
3788     // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially
3789     // matched operation.
3790     TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3791         TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3792 
3793     if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) &&
3794         matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
3795       return true;
3796 
3797     // Restore the old addr mode info.
3798     AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3799     AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3800     TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3801 
3802     // Otherwise this was over-aggressive.  Try merging in the LHS then the RHS.
3803     if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) &&
3804         matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1))
3805       return true;
3806 
3807     // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in.
3808     AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3809     AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3810     TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3811     break;
3812   }
3813   //case Instruction::Or:
3814   // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD.
3815   //break;
3816   case Instruction::Mul:
3817   case Instruction::Shl: {
3818     // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3819     ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1));
3820     if (!RHS || RHS->getBitWidth() > 64)
3821       return false;
3822     int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue();
3823     if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl)
3824       Scale = 1LL << Scale;
3825 
3826     return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth);
3827   }
3828   case Instruction::GetElementPtr: {
3829     // Scan the GEP.  We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most
3830     // one variable offset.
3831     int VariableOperand = -1;
3832     unsigned VariableScale = 0;
3833 
3834     int64_t ConstantOffset = 0;
3835     gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst);
3836     for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) {
3837       if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) {
3838         const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy);
3839         unsigned Idx =
3840           cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue();
3841         ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx);
3842       } else {
3843         uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType());
3844         if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) {
3845           const APInt &CVal = CI->getValue();
3846           if (CVal.getMinSignedBits() <= 64) {
3847             ConstantOffset += CVal.getSExtValue() * TypeSize;
3848             continue;
3849           }
3850         }
3851         if (TypeSize) {  // Scales of zero don't do anything.
3852           // We only allow one variable index at the moment.
3853           if (VariableOperand != -1)
3854             return false;
3855 
3856           // Remember the variable index.
3857           VariableOperand = i;
3858           VariableScale = TypeSize;
3859         }
3860       }
3861     }
3862 
3863     // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset.  In this case,
3864     // just add it to the disp field and check validity.
3865     if (VariableOperand == -1) {
3866       AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
3867       if (ConstantOffset == 0 ||
3868           TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
3869         // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too.
3870         if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
3871           return true;
3872       } else if (EnableGEPOffsetSplit && isa<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst) &&
3873                  TLI.shouldConsiderGEPOffsetSplit() && Depth == 0 &&
3874                  ConstantOffset > 0) {
3875         // Record GEPs with non-zero offsets as candidates for splitting in the
3876         // event that the offset cannot fit into the r+i addressing mode.
3877         // Simple and common case that only one GEP is used in calculating the
3878         // address for the memory access.
3879         Value *Base = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3880         auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Base);
3881         auto *GEP = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst);
3882         if (isa<Argument>(Base) || isa<GlobalValue>(Base) ||
3883             (BaseI && !isa<CastInst>(BaseI) &&
3884              !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(BaseI))) {
3885           // If the base is an instruction, make sure the GEP is not in the same
3886           // basic block as the base. If the base is an argument or global
3887           // value, make sure the GEP is not in the entry block.  Otherwise,
3888           // instruction selection can undo the split.  Also make sure the
3889           // parent block allows inserting non-PHI instructions before the
3890           // terminator.
3891           BasicBlock *Parent =
3892               BaseI ? BaseI->getParent() : &GEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock();
3893           if (GEP->getParent() != Parent && !Parent->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
3894             LargeOffsetGEP = std::make_pair(GEP, ConstantOffset);
3895         }
3896       }
3897       AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset;
3898       return false;
3899     }
3900 
3901     // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match.
3902     ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3903     unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3904 
3905     // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target.
3906     AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
3907 
3908     // Match the base operand of the GEP.
3909     if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) {
3910       // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register.
3911       if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
3912         AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3913         AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3914         return false;
3915       }
3916       AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3917       AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3918     }
3919 
3920     // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP.
3921     if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale,
3922                           Depth)) {
3923       // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register
3924       // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale.
3925       AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3926       AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3927       if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg)
3928         return false;
3929       AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3930       AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3931       AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
3932       if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand),
3933                             VariableScale, Depth)) {
3934         // If even that didn't work, bail.
3935         AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3936         AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3937         return false;
3938       }
3939     }
3940 
3941     return true;
3942   }
3943   case Instruction::SExt:
3944   case Instruction::ZExt: {
3945     Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst);
3946     if (!Ext)
3947       return false;
3948 
3949     // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode.
3950     // Ask for a method for doing so.
3951     TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
3952         TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts);
3953     if (!TPH)
3954       return false;
3955 
3956     TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3957         TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3958     unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0;
3959     unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext);
3960     Value *PromotedOperand =
3961         TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI);
3962     // SExt has been moved away.
3963     // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is
3964     // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point.
3965     // E.g.,
3966     // op = add opnd, 1
3967     // idx = ext op
3968     // addr = gep base, idx
3969     // is now:
3970     // promotedOpnd = ext opnd            <- no match here
3971     // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1  <- match (later in recursive calls)
3972     // addr = gep base, op                <- match
3973     if (MovedAway)
3974       *MovedAway = true;
3975 
3976     assert(PromotedOperand &&
3977            "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
3978 
3979     ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3980     unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3981 
3982     if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) ||
3983         // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created
3984         // instructions.
3985         // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus
3986         // what we have saved in the addressing mode.
3987         !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost,
3988                                ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize),
3989                                PromotedOperand)) {
3990       AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3991       AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3992       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n");
3993       TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3994       return false;
3995     }
3996     return true;
3997   }
3998   }
3999   return false;
4000 }
4001 
4002 /// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode.
4003 /// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode
4004 /// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t
4005 /// for the target.
4006 ///
4007 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) {
4008   // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching
4009   // fails.
4010   TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4011       TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4012   if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) {
4013     // Fold in immediates if legal for the target.
4014     AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue();
4015     if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
4016       return true;
4017     AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue();
4018   } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) {
4019     // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode.
4020     if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) {
4021       AddrMode.BaseGV = GV;
4022       if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
4023         return true;
4024       AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr;
4025     }
4026   } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) {
4027     ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
4028     unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
4029 
4030     // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation.
4031     bool MovedAway = false;
4032     if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) {
4033       // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing
4034       // to check here.
4035       if (MovedAway)
4036         return true;
4037       // Okay, it's possible to fold this.  Check to see if it is actually
4038       // *profitable* to do so.  We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing
4039       // register pressure too much.
4040       if (I->hasOneUse() ||
4041           isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) {
4042         AddrModeInsts.push_back(I);
4043         return true;
4044       }
4045 
4046       // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back.
4047       //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I;
4048       AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
4049       AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
4050       TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4051     }
4052   } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) {
4053     if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth))
4054       return true;
4055     TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4056   } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) {
4057     // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode.
4058     return true;
4059   }
4060 
4061   // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :)
4062   if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
4063     AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
4064     AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr;
4065     // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r].
4066     if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
4067       return true;
4068     AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false;
4069     AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
4070   }
4071 
4072   // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r].
4073   if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) {
4074     AddrMode.Scale = 1;
4075     AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr;
4076     if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
4077       return true;
4078     AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4079     AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr;
4080   }
4081   // Couldn't match.
4082   TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4083   return false;
4084 }
4085 
4086 /// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due
4087 /// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false.
4088 static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal,
4089                                     const TargetLowering &TLI,
4090                                     const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) {
4091   const Function *F = CI->getFunction();
4092   TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
4093       TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI,
4094                             ImmutableCallSite(CI));
4095 
4096   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4097     TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
4098 
4099     // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
4100     TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
4101 
4102     // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory
4103     // operand, we can't fold it!
4104     if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal &&
4105         (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory ||
4106          !OpInfo.isIndirect))
4107       return false;
4108   }
4109 
4110   return true;
4111 }
4112 
4113 // Max number of memory uses to look at before aborting the search to conserve
4114 // compile time.
4115 static constexpr int MaxMemoryUsesToScan = 20;
4116 
4117 /// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use.
4118 /// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true.
4119 /// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses.
4120 static bool FindAllMemoryUses(
4121     Instruction *I,
4122     SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses,
4123     SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetLowering &TLI,
4124     const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, int SeenInsts = 0) {
4125   // If we already considered this instruction, we're done.
4126   if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second)
4127     return false;
4128 
4129   // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out.
4130   if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I))
4131     return true;
4132 
4133   const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize();
4134 
4135   // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them.
4136   for (Use &U : I->uses()) {
4137     // Conservatively return true if we're seeing a large number or a deep chain
4138     // of users. This avoids excessive compilation times in pathological cases.
4139     if (SeenInsts++ >= MaxMemoryUsesToScan)
4140       return true;
4141 
4142     Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
4143     if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) {
4144       MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo()));
4145       continue;
4146     }
4147 
4148     if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) {
4149       unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4150       if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4151         return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4152       MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo));
4153       continue;
4154     }
4155 
4156     if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) {
4157       unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4158       if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4159         return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4160       MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo));
4161       continue;
4162     }
4163 
4164     if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) {
4165       unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4166       if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4167         return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4168       MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo));
4169       continue;
4170     }
4171 
4172     if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) {
4173       // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into
4174       // the cold path.  See optimizeCallInst
4175       if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
4176         continue;
4177 
4178       InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue());
4179       if (!IA) return true;
4180 
4181       // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out.
4182       if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI))
4183         return true;
4184       continue;
4185     }
4186 
4187     if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI,
4188                           SeenInsts))
4189       return true;
4190   }
4191 
4192   return false;
4193 }
4194 
4195 /// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're
4196 /// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing
4197 /// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the
4198 /// instruction already.
4199 bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1,
4200                                                    Value *KnownLive2) {
4201   // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live!
4202   if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2)
4203     return true;
4204 
4205   // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live.
4206   if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true;
4207 
4208   // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is
4209   // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is
4210   // live for the whole function.
4211   if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val))
4212     if (AI->isStaticAlloca())
4213       return true;
4214 
4215   // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's
4216   // block.  If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we
4217   // can reasonably fold it.
4218   return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent());
4219 }
4220 
4221 /// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified
4222 /// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it.
4223 /// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses.
4224 /// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it
4225 /// into the load. For example, consider this code:
4226 ///
4227 ///     X = ...
4228 ///     Y = X+1
4229 ///     use(Y)   -> nonload/store
4230 ///     Z = Y+1
4231 ///     load Z
4232 ///
4233 /// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z
4234 /// (yielding load [X+2]).  However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to
4235 /// be live at the use(Y) line.  If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one
4236 /// fewer register.  Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the
4237 /// number of computations either.
4238 ///
4239 /// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic.  If
4240 /// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to
4241 /// fold the addressing mode in the Z case.  This would make Y die earlier.
4242 bool AddressingModeMatcher::
4243 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
4244                                      ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) {
4245   if (IgnoreProfitability) return true;
4246 
4247   // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it,
4248   // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded.  Get
4249   // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those
4250   // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this
4251   // address extends the lifetime of.
4252   //
4253   // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here,
4254   // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any
4255   // folded immediates).
4256   Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg;
4257 
4258   // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their
4259   // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction.
4260   if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
4261     BaseReg = nullptr;
4262   if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
4263     ScaledReg = nullptr;
4264 
4265   // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live
4266   // ranges, we're ok with it.
4267   if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg)
4268     return true;
4269 
4270   // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them,
4271   // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register
4272   // for another (at worst.)  In this context, folding an addressing mode into
4273   // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it.
4274   SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses;
4275   SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts;
4276   if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI))
4277     return false;  // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use!
4278 
4279   // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of
4280   // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded
4281   // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see
4282   // if they could  *actually* fold the instruction.  The assumption is that
4283   // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved
4284   // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates
4285   // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code
4286   // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to
4287   // compute an effective address.  (i.e LEA on x86)
4288   SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts;
4289   for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4290     Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first;
4291     unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second;
4292 
4293     // Get the access type of this use.  If the use isn't a pointer, we don't
4294     // know what it accesses.
4295     Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo);
4296     PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType());
4297     if (!AddrTy)
4298       return false;
4299     Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType();
4300     unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace();
4301 
4302     // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This
4303     // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will
4304     // *actually* cover the shared instruction.
4305     ExtAddrMode Result;
4306     std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr,
4307                                                                       0);
4308     TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4309         TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4310     AddressingModeMatcher Matcher(
4311         MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AddressAccessTy, AS, MemoryInst, Result,
4312         InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP);
4313     Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true;
4314     bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0);
4315     (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
4316 
4317     // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not
4318     // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped
4319     // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state.
4320     TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4321 
4322     // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it.
4323     if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I))
4324       return false;
4325 
4326     MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear();
4327   }
4328 
4329   return true;
4330 }
4331 
4332 /// Return true if the specified values are defined in a
4333 /// different basic block than BB.
4334 static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
4335   if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
4336     return I->getParent() != BB;
4337   return false;
4338 }
4339 
4340 /// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so
4341 /// can be done without increasing register pressure.  The need for the
4342 /// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing
4343 /// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation.
4344 ///
4345 /// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do
4346 /// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try
4347 /// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the
4348 /// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As
4349 /// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible.
4350 ///
4351 /// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory
4352 /// operands.  It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold
4353 /// call sites into their (cold) basic block.
4354 ///
4355 /// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can
4356 /// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure
4357 /// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the
4358 /// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.).
4359 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
4360                                         Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) {
4361   Value *Repl = Addr;
4362 
4363   // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes.  This is necessary to undo
4364   // unprofitable PRE transformations.
4365   SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist;
4366   SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited;
4367   worklist.push_back(Addr);
4368 
4369   // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI and select nodes, and
4370   // ensure that the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI/select roots of
4371   // the graph are compatible.
4372   bool PhiOrSelectSeen = false;
4373   SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts;
4374   const SimplifyQuery SQ(*DL, TLInfo);
4375   AddressingModeCombiner AddrModes(SQ, { Addr, MemoryInst->getParent() });
4376   TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
4377   TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4378       TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4379   while (!worklist.empty()) {
4380     Value *V = worklist.back();
4381     worklist.pop_back();
4382 
4383     // We allow traversing cyclic Phi nodes.
4384     // In case of success after this loop we ensure that traversing through
4385     // Phi nodes ends up with all cases to compute address of the form
4386     //    BaseGV + Base + Scale * Index + Offset
4387     // where Scale and Offset are constans and BaseGV, Base and Index
4388     // are exactly the same Values in all cases.
4389     // It means that BaseGV, Scale and Offset dominate our memory instruction
4390     // and have the same value as they had in address computation represented
4391     // as Phi. So we can safely sink address computation to memory instruction.
4392     if (!Visited.insert(V).second)
4393       continue;
4394 
4395     // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values.
4396     if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) {
4397       for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values())
4398         worklist.push_back(IncValue);
4399       PhiOrSelectSeen = true;
4400       continue;
4401     }
4402     // Similar for select.
4403     if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) {
4404       worklist.push_back(SI->getFalseValue());
4405       worklist.push_back(SI->getTrueValue());
4406       PhiOrSelectSeen = true;
4407       continue;
4408     }
4409 
4410     // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed.  Note that
4411     // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate
4412     // addressing instructions might have.
4413     AddrModeInsts.clear();
4414     std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr,
4415                                                                       0);
4416     ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match(
4417         V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, AddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI,
4418         InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP);
4419 
4420     GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP.first;
4421     if (GEP && GEP->getParent() != MemoryInst->getParent() &&
4422         !NewGEPBases.count(GEP)) {
4423       // If splitting the underlying data structure can reduce the offset of a
4424       // GEP, collect the GEP.  Skip the GEPs that are the new bases of
4425       // previously split data structures.
4426       LargeOffsetGEPMap[GEP->getPointerOperand()].push_back(LargeOffsetGEP);
4427       if (LargeOffsetGEPID.find(GEP) == LargeOffsetGEPID.end())
4428         LargeOffsetGEPID[GEP] = LargeOffsetGEPID.size();
4429     }
4430 
4431     NewAddrMode.OriginalValue = V;
4432     if (!AddrModes.addNewAddrMode(NewAddrMode))
4433       break;
4434   }
4435 
4436   // Try to combine the AddrModes we've collected. If we couldn't collect any,
4437   // or we have multiple but either couldn't combine them or combining them
4438   // wouldn't do anything useful, bail out now.
4439   if (!AddrModes.combineAddrModes()) {
4440     TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4441     return false;
4442   }
4443   TPT.commit();
4444 
4445   // Get the combined AddrMode (or the only AddrMode, if we only had one).
4446   ExtAddrMode AddrMode = AddrModes.getAddrMode();
4447 
4448   // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything.
4449   // If we saw a Phi node then it is not local definitely, and if we saw a select
4450   // then we want to push the address calculation past it even if it's already
4451   // in this BB.
4452   if (!PhiOrSelectSeen && none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) {
4453         return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent());
4454                   })) {
4455     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found      local addrmode: " << AddrMode
4456                       << "\n");
4457     return false;
4458   }
4459 
4460   // Insert this computation right after this user.  Since our caller is
4461   // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are
4462   // guaranteed to happen later.
4463   IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst);
4464 
4465   // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know
4466   // that we have to sink it into this block.  Check to see if we have already
4467   // done this for some other load/store instr in this block.  If so, reuse
4468   // the computation.  Before attempting reuse, check if the address is valid
4469   // as it may have been erased.
4470 
4471   WeakTrackingVH SunkAddrVH = SunkAddrs[Addr];
4472 
4473   Value * SunkAddr = SunkAddrVH.pointsToAliveValue() ? SunkAddrVH : nullptr;
4474   if (SunkAddr) {
4475     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode
4476                       << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n");
4477     if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
4478       SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
4479   } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs ||
4480              (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM && TTI->useAA())) {
4481     // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This
4482     // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities.
4483     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode
4484                       << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n");
4485     Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
4486     Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr;
4487 
4488     // First, find the pointer.
4489     if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4490       ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg;
4491       AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
4492     }
4493 
4494     if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4495       // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a
4496       // pointer (both of which seem meaningless).
4497       if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4498         return false;
4499 
4500       ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4501       AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4502     }
4503 
4504     // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4505     // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4506     // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4507     // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4508     // do not match instead of extending it.
4509     //
4510     // (See below for code to add the scale.)
4511     if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4512       Type *ScaledRegTy = AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType();
4513       if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() >
4514           cast<IntegerType>(ScaledRegTy)->getBitWidth())
4515         return false;
4516     }
4517 
4518     if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
4519       if (ResultPtr)
4520         return false;
4521 
4522       ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV;
4523     }
4524 
4525     // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher
4526     // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case,
4527     // use it here.
4528     if (!DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType())) {
4529       if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4530         ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(),
4531                                            "sunkaddr");
4532         AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
4533       } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) {
4534         ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(),
4535                                            "sunkaddr");
4536         AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4537       }
4538     }
4539 
4540     if (!ResultPtr &&
4541         !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4542       SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
4543     } else if (!ResultPtr) {
4544       return false;
4545     } else {
4546       Type *I8PtrTy =
4547           Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
4548       Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
4549 
4550       // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4551       // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4552       // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4553       // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4554       // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4555       if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4556         Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
4557         if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
4558           V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
4559 
4560         ResultIndex = V;
4561       }
4562 
4563       // Add the scale value.
4564       if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4565         Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4566         if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4567           // done.
4568         } else {
4569           assert(cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4570                  cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth() &&
4571                  "We can't transform if ScaledReg is too narrow");
4572           V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4573         }
4574 
4575         if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4576           V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4577                                 "sunkaddr");
4578         if (ResultIndex)
4579           ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr");
4580         else
4581           ResultIndex = V;
4582       }
4583 
4584       // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4585       if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4586         Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
4587         if (ResultIndex) {
4588           // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with
4589           // SDAG consecutive load/store merging.
4590           if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
4591             ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
4592           ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
4593         }
4594 
4595         ResultIndex = V;
4596       }
4597 
4598       if (!ResultIndex) {
4599         SunkAddr = ResultPtr;
4600       } else {
4601         if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
4602           ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
4603         SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
4604       }
4605 
4606       if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
4607         SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
4608     }
4609   } else {
4610     // We'd require a ptrtoint/inttoptr down the line, which we can't do for
4611     // non-integral pointers, so in that case bail out now.
4612     Type *BaseTy = AddrMode.BaseReg ? AddrMode.BaseReg->getType() : nullptr;
4613     Type *ScaleTy = AddrMode.Scale ? AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType() : nullptr;
4614     PointerType *BasePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(BaseTy);
4615     PointerType *ScalePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(ScaleTy);
4616     if (DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType()) ||
4617         (BasePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(BasePtrTy)) ||
4618         (ScalePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(ScalePtrTy)) ||
4619         (AddrMode.BaseGV &&
4620          DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(AddrMode.BaseGV->getType())))
4621       return false;
4622 
4623     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode
4624                       << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n");
4625     Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
4626     Value *Result = nullptr;
4627 
4628     // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4629     // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4630     // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4631     // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4632     // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4633     if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4634       Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
4635       if (V->getType()->isPointerTy())
4636         V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4637       if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
4638         V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
4639       Result = V;
4640     }
4641 
4642     // Add the scale value.
4643     if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4644       Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4645       if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4646         // done.
4647       } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4648         V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4649       } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4650                  cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
4651         V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4652       } else {
4653         // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4654         // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4655         // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4656         // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4657         // do not match instead of extending it.
4658         Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result);
4659         if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg))
4660           I->eraseFromParent();
4661         return false;
4662       }
4663       if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4664         V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4665                               "sunkaddr");
4666       if (Result)
4667         Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
4668       else
4669         Result = V;
4670     }
4671 
4672     // Add in the BaseGV if present.
4673     if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
4674       Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
4675       if (Result)
4676         Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
4677       else
4678         Result = V;
4679     }
4680 
4681     // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4682     if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4683       Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
4684       if (Result)
4685         Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
4686       else
4687         Result = V;
4688     }
4689 
4690     if (!Result)
4691       SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
4692     else
4693       SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
4694   }
4695 
4696   MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr);
4697   // Store the newly computed address into the cache. In the case we reused a
4698   // value, this should be idempotent.
4699   SunkAddrs[Addr] = WeakTrackingVH(SunkAddr);
4700 
4701   // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions
4702   // using it.
4703   if (Repl->use_empty()) {
4704     // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator.
4705     // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens.
4706     Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
4707     WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
4708     BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent();
4709 
4710     RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo);
4711 
4712     if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
4713       // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
4714       // start of the block.
4715       CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
4716       SunkAddrs.clear();
4717     }
4718   }
4719   ++NumMemoryInsts;
4720   return true;
4721 }
4722 
4723 /// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their
4724 /// address computing into the block when possible / profitable.
4725 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) {
4726   bool MadeChange = false;
4727 
4728   const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI =
4729       TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getFunction())->getRegisterInfo();
4730   TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
4731       TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS);
4732   unsigned ArgNo = 0;
4733   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4734     TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
4735 
4736     // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
4737     TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
4738 
4739     if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory &&
4740         OpInfo.isIndirect) {
4741       Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++);
4742       MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u);
4743     } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput)
4744       ArgNo++;
4745   }
4746 
4747   return MadeChange;
4748 }
4749 
4750 /// Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or
4751 /// sign extensions.
4752 static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
4753   assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use");
4754   const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin());
4755   bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser);
4756   Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType();
4757   for (const User *U : Val->users()) {
4758     const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
4759     if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI)))
4760       return false;
4761     Type *CurTy = UI->getType();
4762     // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE.
4763     if (CurTy == ExtTy)
4764       continue;
4765 
4766     // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation:
4767     // a = Val
4768     // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4769     // c = sext ty1 a to ty3
4770     // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into:
4771     // a = Val
4772     // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4773     // c = sext ty2 b to ty3
4774     // However, the last sext is not free.
4775     if (IsSExt)
4776       return false;
4777 
4778     // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another.
4779     // In that case, we would not account for a different use.
4780     Type *NarrowTy;
4781     Type *LargeTy;
4782     if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
4783         CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) {
4784       NarrowTy = CurTy;
4785       LargeTy = ExtTy;
4786     } else {
4787       NarrowTy = ExtTy;
4788       LargeTy = CurTy;
4789     }
4790 
4791     if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy))
4792       return false;
4793   }
4794   // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free.
4795   return true;
4796 }
4797 
4798 /// Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue
4799 /// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is
4800 /// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts.
4801 /// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert
4802 /// them.
4803 ///
4804 /// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise.
4805 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts(
4806     TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
4807     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
4808     unsigned CreatedInstsCost) {
4809   bool Promoted = false;
4810 
4811   // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them.
4812   for (auto I : Exts) {
4813     // Early check if we directly have ext(load).
4814     if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) {
4815       ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4816       continue;
4817     }
4818 
4819     // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion.  The reason we have
4820     // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension
4821     // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved
4822     // up without any promotion on its operands.
4823     if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion)
4824       return false;
4825 
4826     // Get the action to perform the promotion.
4827     TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
4828         TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts);
4829     // Check if we can promote.
4830     if (!TPH) {
4831       // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand.
4832       ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4833       continue;
4834     }
4835 
4836     // Save the current state.
4837     TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4838         TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4839     SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts;
4840     unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0;
4841     unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I);
4842     // Promote.
4843     Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost,
4844                              &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI);
4845     assert(PromotedVal &&
4846            "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
4847 
4848     // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load.
4849     // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically
4850     // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality.
4851     // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge
4852     // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going,
4853     // because the new extension may be removed too.
4854     long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost;
4855     // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of
4856     // conservatively ceiling it to 0.
4857     TotalCreatedInstsCost =
4858         std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost));
4859     if (!StressExtLdPromotion &&
4860         (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 ||
4861          !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) {
4862       // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and
4863       // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest
4864       // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable.
4865       TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4866       ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4867       continue;
4868     }
4869     // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable.
4870     SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts;
4871     (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost);
4872     bool NewPromoted = false;
4873     for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) {
4874       Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst);
4875       Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0);
4876       // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check
4877       // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load).
4878       if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) &&
4879           !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost ||
4880             (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI))))
4881         continue;
4882 
4883       ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt);
4884       NewPromoted = true;
4885     }
4886 
4887     // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback
4888     // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension.
4889     if (!NewPromoted) {
4890       TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4891       ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4892       continue;
4893     }
4894     // The promotion is profitable.
4895     Promoted = true;
4896   }
4897   return Promoted;
4898 }
4899 
4900 /// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other.
4901 bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F) {
4902   DominatorTree DT(F);
4903   bool Changed = false;
4904   for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) {
4905     SExts &Insts = Entry.second;
4906     SExts CurPts;
4907     for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) {
4908       if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) ||
4909           Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first)
4910         continue;
4911       bool inserted = false;
4912       for (auto &Pt : CurPts) {
4913         if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) {
4914           Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst);
4915           RemovedInsts.insert(Pt);
4916           Pt->removeFromParent();
4917           Pt = Inst;
4918           inserted = true;
4919           Changed = true;
4920           break;
4921         }
4922         if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst))
4923           // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the
4924           // experiments show it is not profitable.
4925           continue;
4926         Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt);
4927         RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
4928         Inst->removeFromParent();
4929         inserted = true;
4930         Changed = true;
4931         break;
4932       }
4933       if (!inserted)
4934         CurPts.push_back(Inst);
4935     }
4936   }
4937   return Changed;
4938 }
4939 
4940 // Spliting large data structures so that the GEPs accessing them can have
4941 // smaller offsets so that they can be sunk to the same blocks as their users.
4942 // For example, a large struct starting from %base is splitted into two parts
4943 // where the second part starts from %new_base.
4944 //
4945 // Before:
4946 // BB0:
4947 //   %base     =
4948 //
4949 // BB1:
4950 //   %gep0     = gep %base, off0
4951 //   %gep1     = gep %base, off1
4952 //   %gep2     = gep %base, off2
4953 //
4954 // BB2:
4955 //   %load1    = load %gep0
4956 //   %load2    = load %gep1
4957 //   %load3    = load %gep2
4958 //
4959 // After:
4960 // BB0:
4961 //   %base     =
4962 //   %new_base = gep %base, off0
4963 //
4964 // BB1:
4965 //   %new_gep0 = %new_base
4966 //   %new_gep1 = gep %new_base, off1 - off0
4967 //   %new_gep2 = gep %new_base, off2 - off0
4968 //
4969 // BB2:
4970 //   %load1    = load i32, i32* %new_gep0
4971 //   %load2    = load i32, i32* %new_gep1
4972 //   %load3    = load i32, i32* %new_gep2
4973 //
4974 // %new_gep1 and %new_gep2 can be sunk to BB2 now after the splitting because
4975 // their offsets are smaller enough to fit into the addressing mode.
4976 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitLargeGEPOffsets() {
4977   bool Changed = false;
4978   for (auto &Entry : LargeOffsetGEPMap) {
4979     Value *OldBase = Entry.first;
4980     SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>>
4981         &LargeOffsetGEPs = Entry.second;
4982     auto compareGEPOffset =
4983         [&](const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &LHS,
4984             const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &RHS) {
4985           if (LHS.first == RHS.first)
4986             return false;
4987           if (LHS.second != RHS.second)
4988             return LHS.second < RHS.second;
4989           return LargeOffsetGEPID[LHS.first] < LargeOffsetGEPID[RHS.first];
4990         };
4991     // Sorting all the GEPs of the same data structures based on the offsets.
4992     llvm::sort(LargeOffsetGEPs, compareGEPOffset);
4993     LargeOffsetGEPs.erase(
4994         std::unique(LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(), LargeOffsetGEPs.end()),
4995         LargeOffsetGEPs.end());
4996     // Skip if all the GEPs have the same offsets.
4997     if (LargeOffsetGEPs.front().second == LargeOffsetGEPs.back().second)
4998       continue;
4999     GetElementPtrInst *BaseGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->first;
5000     int64_t BaseOffset = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->second;
5001     Value *NewBaseGEP = nullptr;
5002 
5003     auto LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin();
5004     while (LargeOffsetGEP != LargeOffsetGEPs.end()) {
5005       GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP->first;
5006       int64_t Offset = LargeOffsetGEP->second;
5007       if (Offset != BaseOffset) {
5008         TargetLowering::AddrMode AddrMode;
5009         AddrMode.BaseOffs = Offset - BaseOffset;
5010         // The result type of the GEP might not be the type of the memory
5011         // access.
5012         if (!TLI->isLegalAddressingMode(*DL, AddrMode,
5013                                         GEP->getResultElementType(),
5014                                         GEP->getAddressSpace())) {
5015           // We need to create a new base if the offset to the current base is
5016           // too large to fit into the addressing mode. So, a very large struct
5017           // may be splitted into several parts.
5018           BaseGEP = GEP;
5019           BaseOffset = Offset;
5020           NewBaseGEP = nullptr;
5021         }
5022       }
5023 
5024       // Generate a new GEP to replace the current one.
5025       IRBuilder<> Builder(GEP);
5026       Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(GEP->getType());
5027       Type *I8PtrTy =
5028           Builder.getInt8PtrTy(GEP->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
5029       Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
5030 
5031       if (!NewBaseGEP) {
5032         // Create a new base if we don't have one yet.  Find the insertion
5033         // pointer for the new base first.
5034         BasicBlock::iterator NewBaseInsertPt;
5035         BasicBlock *NewBaseInsertBB;
5036         if (auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OldBase)) {
5037           // If the base of the struct is an instruction, the new base will be
5038           // inserted close to it.
5039           NewBaseInsertBB = BaseI->getParent();
5040           if (isa<PHINode>(BaseI))
5041             NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
5042           else if (InvokeInst *Invoke = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(BaseI)) {
5043             NewBaseInsertBB =
5044                 SplitEdge(NewBaseInsertBB, Invoke->getNormalDest());
5045             NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
5046           } else
5047             NewBaseInsertPt = std::next(BaseI->getIterator());
5048         } else {
5049           // If the current base is an argument or global value, the new base
5050           // will be inserted to the entry block.
5051           NewBaseInsertBB = &BaseGEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock();
5052           NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
5053         }
5054         IRBuilder<> NewBaseBuilder(NewBaseInsertBB, NewBaseInsertPt);
5055         // Create a new base.
5056         Value *BaseIndex = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffset);
5057         NewBaseGEP = OldBase;
5058         if (NewBaseGEP->getType() != I8PtrTy)
5059           NewBaseGEP = NewBaseBuilder.CreatePointerCast(NewBaseGEP, I8PtrTy);
5060         NewBaseGEP =
5061             NewBaseBuilder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, BaseIndex, "splitgep");
5062         NewGEPBases.insert(NewBaseGEP);
5063       }
5064 
5065       Value *NewGEP = NewBaseGEP;
5066       if (Offset == BaseOffset) {
5067         if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy)
5068           NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType());
5069       } else {
5070         // Calculate the new offset for the new GEP.
5071         Value *Index = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, Offset - BaseOffset);
5072         NewGEP = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, Index);
5073 
5074         if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy)
5075           NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType());
5076       }
5077       GEP->replaceAllUsesWith(NewGEP);
5078       LargeOffsetGEPID.erase(GEP);
5079       LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.erase(LargeOffsetGEP);
5080       GEP->eraseFromParent();
5081       Changed = true;
5082     }
5083   }
5084   return Changed;
5085 }
5086 
5087 /// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in
5088 /// \p MovedExts.
5089 bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd(
5090     const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI,
5091     Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) {
5092   for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) {
5093     if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) {
5094       LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0));
5095       Inst = MovedExtInst;
5096       break;
5097     }
5098   }
5099   if (!LI)
5100     return false;
5101 
5102   // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do.
5103   // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote.
5104   // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable.
5105   if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent())
5106     return false;
5107 
5108   return TLI->isExtLoad(LI, Inst, *DL);
5109 }
5110 
5111 /// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load,
5112 /// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the
5113 /// extend into the load.
5114 ///
5115 /// E.g.,
5116 /// \code
5117 /// %ld = load i32* %addr
5118 /// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4
5119 /// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64
5120 // \endcode
5121 /// =>
5122 /// \code
5123 /// %ld = load i32* %addr
5124 /// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64
5125 /// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4
5126 /// \encode
5127 /// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which
5128 /// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64.
5129 ///
5130 /// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended
5131 /// value used into memory accesses.
5132 /// E.g.,
5133 /// \code
5134 /// a = add nsw i32 b, 3
5135 /// d = sext i32 a to i64
5136 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d
5137 /// \endcode
5138 /// =>
5139 /// \code
5140 /// f = sext i32 b to i64
5141 /// a = add nsw i64 f, 3
5142 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a
5143 /// \endcode
5144 ///
5145 /// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some
5146 /// promotions apply.
5147 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) {
5148   // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to
5149   // be effective.
5150   if (!TLI)
5151     return false;
5152 
5153   bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false;
5154   /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type
5155   /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right
5156   /// type and used in memory accesses.
5157   bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion(
5158       *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader);
5159   TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
5160   TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
5161       TPT.getRestorationPoint();
5162   SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
5163   SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts;
5164   Exts.push_back(Inst);
5165 
5166   bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts);
5167 
5168   // Look for a load being extended.
5169   LoadInst *LI = nullptr;
5170   Instruction *ExtFedByLoad;
5171 
5172   // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended
5173   // load.
5174   if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) {
5175     assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension");
5176     TPT.commit();
5177     // Move the extend into the same block as the load
5178     ExtFedByLoad->moveAfter(LI);
5179     // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved
5180     // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location
5181     // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact
5182     // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a
5183     // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as
5184     // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug
5185     // location for the load and the zext.
5186     ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc());
5187     ++NumExtsMoved;
5188     Inst = ExtFedByLoad;
5189     return true;
5190   }
5191 
5192   // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets.
5193   if (ATPConsiderable &&
5194       performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
5195                                   HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts))
5196     return true;
5197 
5198   TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
5199   return false;
5200 }
5201 
5202 // Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable.
5203 // If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext
5204 // instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if
5205 // AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the
5206 // extension is just profitable.
5207 bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion(
5208     Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
5209     bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
5210     SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5211   bool Promoted = false;
5212   SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts;
5213   bool AllSeenFirst = true;
5214   for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5215     Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5216     DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen =
5217         SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain);
5218     // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote
5219     // it as well.
5220     if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) {
5221       if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr)
5222         UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second);
5223       AllSeenFirst = false;
5224     }
5225   }
5226 
5227   if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader &&
5228                         SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) {
5229     TPT.commit();
5230     if (HasPromoted)
5231       Promoted = true;
5232     for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5233       Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5234       SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
5235       ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
5236     }
5237     // Update Inst as promotion happen.
5238     Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val();
5239   } else {
5240     // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain
5241     // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt
5242     // chain derived from the same header.
5243     for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5244       Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5245       SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst;
5246     }
5247     return false;
5248   }
5249 
5250   if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty())
5251     for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) {
5252       if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt))
5253         continue;
5254       TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
5255       SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
5256       SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains;
5257       Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt);
5258       bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains);
5259       TPT.commit();
5260       if (HasPromoted)
5261         Promoted = true;
5262       for (auto I : Chains) {
5263         Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5264         // Mark this as handled.
5265         SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
5266         ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
5267       }
5268     }
5269   return Promoted;
5270 }
5271 
5272 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) {
5273   BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent();
5274 
5275   // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all
5276   // other uses of the source with result of extension.
5277   Value *Src = I->getOperand(0);
5278   if (Src->hasOneUse())
5279     return false;
5280 
5281   // Only do this xform if truncating is free.
5282   if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType()))
5283     return false;
5284 
5285   // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in
5286   // this block.
5287   if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent())
5288     return false;
5289 
5290   bool DefIsLiveOut = false;
5291   for (User *U : I->users()) {
5292     Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
5293 
5294     // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
5295     BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
5296     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5297     DefIsLiveOut = true;
5298     break;
5299   }
5300   if (!DefIsLiveOut)
5301     return false;
5302 
5303   // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes.
5304   for (User *U : Src->users()) {
5305     Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
5306     BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
5307     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5308     // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing
5309     // reloads just before load / store instructions.
5310     if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI))
5311       return false;
5312   }
5313 
5314   // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once.
5315   DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs;
5316 
5317   bool MadeChange = false;
5318   for (Use &U : Src->uses()) {
5319     Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
5320 
5321     // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
5322     BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
5323     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5324 
5325     // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use.
5326     Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB];
5327 
5328     if (!InsertedTrunc) {
5329       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
5330       assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5331       InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
5332       InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc);
5333     }
5334 
5335     // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result.
5336     U = InsertedTrunc;
5337     ++NumExtUses;
5338     MadeChange = true;
5339   }
5340 
5341   return MadeChange;
5342 }
5343 
5344 // Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits.  Add an "and"
5345 // just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction,
5346 // with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using
5347 // the loaded value.  "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion
5348 // of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose
5349 // path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially
5350 // remove.
5351 //
5352 // For example:
5353 //
5354 // b0:
5355 //   x = load i32
5356 //   ...
5357 // b1:
5358 //   y = and x, 0xff
5359 //   z = use y
5360 //
5361 // becomes:
5362 //
5363 // b0:
5364 //   x = load i32
5365 //   x' = and x, 0xff
5366 //   ...
5367 // b1:
5368 //   z = use x'
5369 //
5370 // whereas:
5371 //
5372 // b0:
5373 //   x1 = load i32
5374 //   ...
5375 // b1:
5376 //   x2 = load i32
5377 //   ...
5378 // b2:
5379 //   x = phi x1, x2
5380 //   y = and x, 0xff
5381 //
5382 // becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load):
5383 //
5384 // b0:
5385 //   x1 = load i32
5386 //   x1' = and x1, 0xff
5387 //   ...
5388 // b1:
5389 //   x2 = load i32
5390 //   x2' = and x2, 0xff
5391 //   ...
5392 // b2:
5393 //   x = phi x1', x2'
5394 //   y = and x, 0xff
5395 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) {
5396   if (!Load->isSimple() || !Load->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy())
5397     return false;
5398 
5399   // Skip loads we've already transformed.
5400   if (Load->hasOneUse() &&
5401       InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin())))
5402     return false;
5403 
5404   // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits
5405   // of the loaded value are needed.
5406   SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList;
5407   SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited;
5408   SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove;
5409   for (auto *U : Load->users())
5410     WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5411 
5412   EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType());
5413   unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits();
5414   APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0);
5415   APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0);
5416 
5417   while (!WorkList.empty()) {
5418     Instruction *I = WorkList.back();
5419     WorkList.pop_back();
5420 
5421     // Break use-def graph loops.
5422     if (!Visited.insert(I).second)
5423       continue;
5424 
5425     // For a PHI node, push all of its users.
5426     if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
5427       for (auto *U : Phi->users())
5428         WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5429       continue;
5430     }
5431 
5432     switch (I->getOpcode()) {
5433     case Instruction::And: {
5434       auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5435       if (!AndC)
5436         return false;
5437       APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue();
5438       DemandBits |= AndBits;
5439       // Keep track of the widest and mask we see.
5440       if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits))
5441         WidestAndBits = AndBits;
5442       if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load)
5443         AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I);
5444       break;
5445     }
5446 
5447     case Instruction::Shl: {
5448       auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5449       if (!ShlC)
5450         return false;
5451       uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1);
5452       DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt);
5453       break;
5454     }
5455 
5456     case Instruction::Trunc: {
5457       EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType());
5458       unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits();
5459       DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth);
5460       break;
5461     }
5462 
5463     default:
5464       return false;
5465     }
5466   }
5467 
5468   uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits();
5469   // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the
5470   // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid.  For example,
5471   // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but
5472   // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR
5473   // followed by an AND.
5474   // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either
5475   // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to
5476   // a single instruction.
5477   //
5478   // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits
5479   // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel.
5480   if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) ||
5481       WidestAndBits != DemandBits)
5482     return false;
5483 
5484   LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext();
5485   Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits);
5486   EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy);
5487 
5488   // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads.
5489   if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() ||
5490       !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT))
5491     return false;
5492 
5493   IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode());
5494   auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(
5495       Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits)));
5496   // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
5497   // optimizations don't touch it.
5498   InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd);
5499 
5500   // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the
5501   // new and itself).
5502   Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5503   NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load);
5504 
5505   // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant.
5506   for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove)
5507     // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the
5508     // new and.
5509     if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) {
5510       And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5511       if (&*CurInstIterator == And)
5512         CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator());
5513       And->eraseFromParent();
5514       ++NumAndUses;
5515     }
5516 
5517   ++NumAndsAdded;
5518   return true;
5519 }
5520 
5521 /// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction
5522 /// that is only used once.
5523 static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) {
5524   auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
5525   // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side
5526   // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute.
5527   return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
5528          TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive;
5529 }
5530 
5531 /// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch.
5532 static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
5533                                                 const TargetLowering *TLI,
5534                                                 SelectInst *SI) {
5535   // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper.
5536   if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive())
5537     return false;
5538 
5539   // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine
5540   // whether a select is better represented as a branch.
5541 
5542   // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable,
5543   // then we want to replace the select with a branch.
5544   uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
5545   if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
5546     uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
5547     uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
5548     if (Sum != 0) {
5549       auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum);
5550       if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold())
5551         return true;
5552     }
5553   }
5554 
5555   CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition());
5556 
5557   // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its
5558   // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's
5559   // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch.
5560   if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse())
5561     return false;
5562 
5563   // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side
5564   // of the select, we should form a branch.
5565   if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) ||
5566       sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue()))
5567     return true;
5568 
5569   return false;
5570 }
5571 
5572 /// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return
5573 /// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any
5574 /// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select
5575 /// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects.
5576 static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue(
5577     SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue,
5578     const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) {
5579   Value *V;
5580 
5581   for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI);
5582        DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) {
5583     assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() &&
5584            "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI");
5585     V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue());
5586   }
5587   return V;
5588 }
5589 
5590 /// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction,
5591 /// turn it into a branch.
5592 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) {
5593   // If branch conversion isn't desirable, exit early.
5594   if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI)
5595     return false;
5596 
5597   // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition.
5598   SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI;
5599   ASI.push_back(SI);
5600   for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI);
5601        It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) {
5602     SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It);
5603     if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) {
5604       ASI.push_back(I);
5605     } else {
5606       break;
5607     }
5608   }
5609 
5610   SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back();
5611   // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions
5612   // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch.
5613   CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator());
5614 
5615   bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1);
5616 
5617   // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ?
5618   if (VectorCond || SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
5619     return false;
5620 
5621   TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind;
5622   if (VectorCond)
5623     SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect;
5624   else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy())
5625     SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal;
5626   else
5627     SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect;
5628 
5629   if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) &&
5630       !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI))
5631     return false;
5632 
5633   ModifiedDT = true;
5634 
5635   // Transform a sequence like this:
5636   //    start:
5637   //       %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5638   //       %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d
5639   //
5640   // Into:
5641   //    start:
5642   //       %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5643   //       br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false
5644   //    select.true:
5645   //       br label %select.end
5646   //    select.false:
5647   //       br label %select.end
5648   //    select.end:
5649   //       %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ]
5650   //
5651   // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from
5652   // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch.
5653   // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that
5654   // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the
5655   // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI
5656   // predecessor block will be the start block.
5657 
5658   // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks.
5659   BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent();
5660   BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI));
5661   BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end");
5662 
5663   // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split.
5664   StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
5665 
5666   // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch.
5667   // At least one will become an actual new basic block.
5668   BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr;
5669   BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr;
5670   BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr;
5671   BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr;
5672 
5673   // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing
5674   // them speculatively.
5675   for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) {
5676     if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) {
5677       if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
5678         TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink",
5679                                        EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5680         TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock);
5681         TrueBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc());
5682       }
5683       auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue());
5684       TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch);
5685     }
5686     if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) {
5687       if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
5688         FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink",
5689                                         EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5690         FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5691         FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc());
5692       }
5693       auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue());
5694       FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch);
5695     }
5696   }
5697 
5698   // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side
5699   // for a new input value to the PHI.
5700   if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) {
5701     assert(TrueBlock == nullptr &&
5702            "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select");
5703 
5704     FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false",
5705                                     EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5706     auto *FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5707     FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc());
5708   }
5709 
5710   // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition.
5711   // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths
5712   // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block
5713   // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of
5714   // view of the new PHI.
5715   BasicBlock *TT, *FT;
5716   if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
5717     TT = EndBlock;
5718     FT = FalseBlock;
5719     TrueBlock = StartBlock;
5720   } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
5721     TT = TrueBlock;
5722     FT = EndBlock;
5723     FalseBlock = StartBlock;
5724   } else {
5725     TT = TrueBlock;
5726     FT = FalseBlock;
5727   }
5728   IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI);
5729 
5730   SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS;
5731   INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end());
5732   // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the
5733   // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select
5734   // to get the PHI operand.
5735   for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) {
5736     SelectInst *SI = *It;
5737     // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node.
5738     PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front());
5739     PN->takeName(SI);
5740     PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock);
5741     PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock);
5742     PN->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc());
5743 
5744     SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
5745     SI->eraseFromParent();
5746     INS.erase(SI);
5747     ++NumSelectsExpanded;
5748   }
5749 
5750   // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block.
5751   CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end();
5752   return true;
5753 }
5754 
5755 static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
5756   SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask());
5757   int SplatElem = -1;
5758   for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) {
5759     if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem)
5760       return false;
5761     SplatElem = Mask[i];
5762   }
5763 
5764   return true;
5765 }
5766 
5767 /// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same
5768 /// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases
5769 /// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that
5770 /// codegen can spot all lanes are identical.
5771 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
5772   BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent();
5773 
5774   // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive.
5775   if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType()))
5776     return false;
5777 
5778   // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a
5779   // constant splat.
5780   if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI))
5781     return false;
5782 
5783   // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once.
5784   DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles;
5785 
5786   bool MadeChange = false;
5787   for (User *U : SVI->users()) {
5788     Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
5789 
5790     // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
5791     BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
5792     if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5793 
5794     // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction.
5795     if (!UI->isShift()) continue;
5796 
5797     // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't
5798     // already have a copy.
5799     Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB];
5800 
5801     if (!InsertedShuffle) {
5802       BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
5803       assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5804       InsertedShuffle =
5805           new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1),
5806                                 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt);
5807     }
5808 
5809     UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle);
5810     MadeChange = true;
5811   }
5812 
5813   // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle.
5814   if (SVI->use_empty()) {
5815     SVI->eraseFromParent();
5816     MadeChange = true;
5817   }
5818 
5819   return MadeChange;
5820 }
5821 
5822 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) {
5823   if (!TLI || !DL)
5824     return false;
5825 
5826   Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5827   Type *OldType = Cond->getType();
5828   LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext();
5829   MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType));
5830   unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits();
5831 
5832   if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth())
5833     return false;
5834 
5835   // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition
5836   // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the
5837   // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent
5838   // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the
5839   // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends,
5840   // where N is the number of cases in the switch.
5841   auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth);
5842 
5843   // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch
5844   // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended.
5845   // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending
5846   // everything instead.
5847   Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt;
5848   if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond))
5849     if (Arg->hasSExtAttr())
5850       ExtType = Instruction::SExt;
5851 
5852   auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType);
5853   ExtInst->insertBefore(SI);
5854   ExtInst->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc());
5855   SI->setCondition(ExtInst);
5856   for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5857     APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
5858     APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ?
5859                       NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth);
5860     Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst));
5861   }
5862 
5863   return true;
5864 }
5865 
5866 
5867 namespace {
5868 
5869 /// Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one.
5870 /// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition.
5871 /// E.g.,
5872 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5873 /// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0
5874 /// c = scalar_op b
5875 /// store c
5876 ///
5877 /// =>
5878 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5879 /// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane)
5880 /// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0
5881 /// * store d
5882 /// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the
5883 /// transition.
5884 class VectorPromoteHelper {
5885   /// DataLayout associated with the current module.
5886   const DataLayout &DL;
5887 
5888   /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations.
5889   const TargetLowering &TLI;
5890 
5891   /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain.
5892   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
5893 
5894   /// The transition being moved downwards.
5895   Instruction *Transition;
5896 
5897   /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted.
5898   SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted;
5899 
5900   /// Cost of combining a store and an extract.
5901   unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost;
5902 
5903   /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition.
5904   Instruction *CombineInst = nullptr;
5905 
5906   /// The instruction that represents the current end of the transition.
5907   /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain
5908   /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition.
5909   Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const {
5910     if (InstsToBePromoted.empty())
5911       return Transition;
5912     return InstsToBePromoted.back();
5913   }
5914 
5915   /// Return the index of the original value in the transition.
5916   /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value,
5917   /// c, is at index 0.
5918   unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const {
5919     assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5920            "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5921     return 0;
5922   }
5923 
5924   /// Return the index of the index in the transition.
5925   /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index
5926   /// is at index 1.
5927   unsigned getTransitionIdx() const {
5928     assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5929            "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5930     return 1;
5931   }
5932 
5933   /// Get the type of the transition.
5934   /// This is the type of the original value.
5935   /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the
5936   /// transition is <2 x i32>.
5937   Type *getTransitionType() const {
5938     return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType();
5939   }
5940 
5941   /// Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through.
5942   /// I.e., we have the following sequence:
5943   /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2>
5944   /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ...
5945   /// =>
5946   /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ...
5947   /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2>
5948   void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted);
5949 
5950   /// Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the
5951   /// instructions enqueued to be promoted.
5952   bool isProfitableToPromote() {
5953     Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
5954     unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)
5955                          ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue()
5956                          : -1;
5957     Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType();
5958 
5959     StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst);
5960     unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace();
5961     unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment();
5962     // Check if this store is supported.
5963     if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses(
5964             TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS,
5965             Align)) {
5966       // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine
5967       // the extract with the store.
5968       return false;
5969     }
5970 
5971     // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition
5972     // scalar to vector.
5973     // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost.
5974     uint64_t ScalarCost =
5975         TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index);
5976     uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost;
5977     for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) {
5978       // Compute the cost.
5979       // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones.
5980       // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat
5981       // constant.
5982       Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0);
5983       bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) ||
5984                             isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0);
5985       TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK =
5986           IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5987                          : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5988       TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK =
5989           !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5990                           : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5991       ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(
5992           Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5993       VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType,
5994                                                Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5995     }
5996     LLVM_DEBUG(
5997         dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: "
5998                << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n');
5999     return ScalarCost > VectorCost;
6000   }
6001 
6002   /// Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same
6003   /// number of elements as the transition.
6004   /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated
6005   /// across the whole vector.
6006   /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>,
6007   /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible:
6008   /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only
6009   /// used at the index of the extract.
6010   Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const {
6011     unsigned ExtractIdx = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max();
6012     if (!UseSplat) {
6013       // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to
6014       // use a splat constant.
6015       Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx());
6016       if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx))
6017         ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue();
6018       else
6019         UseSplat = true;
6020     }
6021 
6022     unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements();
6023     if (UseSplat)
6024       return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val);
6025 
6026     SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec;
6027     UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType());
6028     for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) {
6029       if (Idx == ExtractIdx)
6030         ConstVec.push_back(Val);
6031       else
6032         ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal);
6033     }
6034     return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec);
6035   }
6036 
6037   /// Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx
6038   /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior.
6039   static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use,
6040                                         unsigned OperandIdx) {
6041     // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on
6042     // the right hand side of a division-like instruction.
6043     if (OperandIdx != 1)
6044       return false;
6045     switch (Use->getOpcode()) {
6046     default:
6047       return false;
6048     case Instruction::SDiv:
6049     case Instruction::UDiv:
6050     case Instruction::SRem:
6051     case Instruction::URem:
6052       return true;
6053     case Instruction::FDiv:
6054     case Instruction::FRem:
6055       return !Use->hasNoNaNs();
6056     }
6057     llvm_unreachable(nullptr);
6058   }
6059 
6060 public:
6061   VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI,
6062                       const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition,
6063                       unsigned CombineCost)
6064       : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition),
6065         StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost) {
6066     assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null");
6067   }
6068 
6069   /// Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type.
6070   bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
6071     // We could support CastInst too.
6072     return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted);
6073   }
6074 
6075   /// Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted
6076   /// by moving downward the transition through.
6077   bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
6078     // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded.
6079     // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions.
6080     for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
6081       const Value *Val = U.get();
6082       if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) {
6083         // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs,
6084         // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a
6085         // division by zero.
6086         if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()))
6087           return false;
6088         continue;
6089       }
6090       if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) &&
6091           !isa<ConstantFP>(Val))
6092         return false;
6093     }
6094     // Check that the resulting operation is legal.
6095     int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode());
6096     if (!ISDOpcode)
6097       return false;
6098     return StressStoreExtract ||
6099            TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
6100                ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true));
6101   }
6102 
6103   /// Check whether or not \p Use can be combined
6104   /// with the transition.
6105   /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse?
6106   bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); }
6107 
6108   /// Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted.
6109   void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
6110     InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted);
6111   }
6112 
6113   /// Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition.
6114   void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) {
6115     assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine");
6116     CombineInst = ToBeCombined;
6117   }
6118 
6119   /// Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is
6120   /// is profitable.
6121   /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise.
6122   bool promote() {
6123     // Check if there is something to promote.
6124     // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with,
6125     // we assume the promotion is not profitable.
6126     if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst)
6127       return false;
6128 
6129     // Check cost.
6130     if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote())
6131       return false;
6132 
6133     // Promote.
6134     for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted)
6135       promoteImpl(ToBePromoted);
6136     InstsToBePromoted.clear();
6137     return true;
6138   }
6139 };
6140 
6141 } // end anonymous namespace
6142 
6143 void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
6144   // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def
6145   // can be statically promoted.
6146   // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted:
6147   // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a
6148   // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2
6149   // Move the transition down.
6150   // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition.
6151   // = ... b => = ... Def.
6152   assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() &&
6153          "The type of the result of the transition does not match "
6154          "the final type");
6155   ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition);
6156   // 2. Update the type of the uses.
6157   // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def.
6158   Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType();
6159   ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy);
6160   // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted
6161   // operands.
6162   // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a.
6163   for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
6164     Value *Val = U.get();
6165     Value *NewVal = nullptr;
6166     if (Val == Transition)
6167       NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
6168     else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) ||
6169              isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) {
6170       // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef.
6171       NewVal = getConstantVector(
6172           cast<Constant>(Val),
6173           isa<UndefValue>(Val) ||
6174               canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()));
6175     } else
6176       llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update "
6177                        "this?");
6178     ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal);
6179   }
6180   Transition->moveAfter(ToBePromoted);
6181   Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted);
6182 }
6183 
6184 /// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction.
6185 /// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target
6186 /// has this feature and this is profitable.
6187 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) {
6188   unsigned CombineCost = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max();
6189   if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI ||
6190       (!StressStoreExtract &&
6191        !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(),
6192                                        Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost)))
6193     return false;
6194 
6195   // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition.
6196   // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until:
6197   // - We can combine the transition with its single use
6198   //   => we got rid of the transition.
6199   // - We escape the current basic block
6200   //   => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and
6201   //      we do not do that for now.
6202   BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent();
6203   LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n');
6204   VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost);
6205   // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be
6206   // beneficial.
6207   while (Inst->hasOneUse()) {
6208     Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
6209     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
6210 
6211     if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) {
6212       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block ("
6213                         << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName()
6214                         << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName()
6215                         << ").\n");
6216       return false;
6217     }
6218 
6219     if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) {
6220       LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n'
6221                         << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
6222       VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted);
6223       bool Changed = VPH.promote();
6224       NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed;
6225       return Changed;
6226     }
6227 
6228     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n");
6229     if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted))
6230       return false;
6231 
6232     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n");
6233 
6234     VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted);
6235     Inst = ToBePromoted;
6236   }
6237   return false;
6238 }
6239 
6240 /// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values
6241 /// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory.
6242 /// Sometimes it is more efficient to generate separate stores for F and I,
6243 /// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places.
6244 ///
6245 ///   (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64),
6246 ///              (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr)  -->
6247 ///   (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4)
6248 ///
6249 /// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like:
6250 /// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
6251 /// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
6252 /// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores.
6253 /// For pair of {i16, i8},  i32 store --> two i16 stores.
6254 /// For pair of {i8, i8},   i16 store --> two i8 stores.
6255 ///
6256 /// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is
6257 /// supported.
6258 ///
6259 /// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below
6260 /// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo.
6261 ///   void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &);
6262 ///   hoo() {
6263 ///     ...
6264 ///     goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp));
6265 ///     ...
6266 ///   }
6267 ///
6268 /// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate
6269 /// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across
6270 /// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated
6271 /// during code expansion.
6272 static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL,
6273                                 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
6274   // Handle simple but common cases only.
6275   Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType();
6276   if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) ||
6277       DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0)
6278     return false;
6279 
6280   unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2;
6281   Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize);
6282   if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) !=
6283       DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType))
6284     return false;
6285 
6286   // Match the following patterns:
6287   // (store (or (zext LValue to i64),
6288   //            (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
6289   //  or
6290   // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
6291   //            (zext LValue to i64),
6292   // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only
6293   // one use.
6294   Value *LValue, *HValue;
6295   if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(),
6296              m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))),
6297                     m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))),
6298                                    m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize))))))
6299     return false;
6300 
6301   // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32.
6302   if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6303       DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize ||
6304       !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6305       DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize)
6306     return false;
6307 
6308   // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast
6309   // as the input of target query.
6310   auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue);
6311   auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue);
6312   EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
6313                   : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType());
6314   EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
6315                    : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType());
6316   if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy))
6317     return false;
6318 
6319   // Start to split store.
6320   IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext());
6321   Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI);
6322 
6323   // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current
6324   // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner.
6325   if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
6326     LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType());
6327   if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
6328     HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType());
6329 
6330   bool IsLE = SI.getModule()->getDataLayout().isLittleEndian();
6331   auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) {
6332     V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType);
6333     Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast(
6334         SI.getOperand(1),
6335         SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace()));
6336     if ((IsLE && Upper) || (!IsLE && !Upper))
6337       Addr = Builder.CreateGEP(
6338           SplitStoreType, Addr,
6339           ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1));
6340     Builder.CreateAlignedStore(
6341         V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment());
6342   };
6343 
6344   CreateSplitStore(LValue, false);
6345   CreateSplitStore(HValue, true);
6346 
6347   // Delete the old store.
6348   SI.eraseFromParent();
6349   return true;
6350 }
6351 
6352 // Return true if the GEP has two operands, the first operand is of a sequential
6353 // type, and the second operand is a constant.
6354 static bool GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GetElementPtrInst *GEP) {
6355   gep_type_iterator I = gep_type_begin(*GEP);
6356   return GEP->getNumOperands() == 2 &&
6357       I.isSequential() &&
6358       isa<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(1));
6359 }
6360 
6361 // Try unmerging GEPs to reduce liveness interference (register pressure) across
6362 // IndirectBr edges. Since IndirectBr edges tend to touch on many blocks,
6363 // reducing liveness interference across those edges benefits global register
6364 // allocation. Currently handles only certain cases.
6365 //
6366 // For example, unmerge %GEPI and %UGEPI as below.
6367 //
6368 // ---------- BEFORE ----------
6369 // SrcBlock:
6370 //   ...
6371 //   %GEPIOp = ...
6372 //   ...
6373 //   %GEPI = gep %GEPIOp, Idx
6374 //   ...
6375 //   indirectbr ... [ label %DstB0, label %DstB1, ... label %DstBi ... ]
6376 //   (* %GEPI is alive on the indirectbr edges due to other uses ahead)
6377 //   (* %GEPIOp is alive on the indirectbr edges only because of it's used by
6378 //   %UGEPI)
6379 //
6380 // DstB0: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged)
6381 // DstB1: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged)
6382 // ...
6383 //
6384 // DstBi:
6385 //   ...
6386 //   %UGEPI = gep %GEPIOp, UIdx
6387 // ...
6388 // ---------------------------
6389 //
6390 // ---------- AFTER ----------
6391 // SrcBlock:
6392 //   ... (same as above)
6393 //    (* %GEPI is still alive on the indirectbr edges)
6394 //    (* %GEPIOp is no longer alive on the indirectbr edges as a result of the
6395 //    unmerging)
6396 // ...
6397 //
6398 // DstBi:
6399 //   ...
6400 //   %UGEPI = gep %GEPI, (UIdx-Idx)
6401 //   ...
6402 // ---------------------------
6403 //
6404 // The register pressure on the IndirectBr edges is reduced because %GEPIOp is
6405 // no longer alive on them.
6406 //
6407 // We try to unmerge GEPs here in CodGenPrepare, as opposed to limiting merging
6408 // of GEPs in the first place in InstCombiner::visitGetElementPtrInst() so as
6409 // not to disable further simplications and optimizations as a result of GEP
6410 // merging.
6411 //
6412 // Note this unmerging may increase the length of the data flow critical path
6413 // (the path from %GEPIOp to %UGEPI would go through %GEPI), which is a tradeoff
6414 // between the register pressure and the length of data-flow critical
6415 // path. Restricting this to the uncommon IndirectBr case would minimize the
6416 // impact of potentially longer critical path, if any, and the impact on compile
6417 // time.
6418 static bool tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GetElementPtrInst *GEPI,
6419                                              const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
6420   BasicBlock *SrcBlock = GEPI->getParent();
6421   // Check that SrcBlock ends with an IndirectBr. If not, give up. The common
6422   // (non-IndirectBr) cases exit early here.
6423   if (!isa<IndirectBrInst>(SrcBlock->getTerminator()))
6424     return false;
6425   // Check that GEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index.
6426   if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GEPI))
6427     return false;
6428   ConstantInt *GEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(GEPI->getOperand(1));
6429   // Check that GEPI is a cheap one.
6430   if (TTI->getIntImmCost(GEPIIdx->getValue(), GEPIIdx->getType())
6431       > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
6432     return false;
6433   Value *GEPIOp = GEPI->getOperand(0);
6434   // Check that GEPIOp is an instruction that's also defined in SrcBlock.
6435   if (!isa<Instruction>(GEPIOp))
6436     return false;
6437   auto *GEPIOpI = cast<Instruction>(GEPIOp);
6438   if (GEPIOpI->getParent() != SrcBlock)
6439     return false;
6440   // Check that GEP is used outside the block, meaning it's alive on the
6441   // IndirectBr edge(s).
6442   if (find_if(GEPI->users(), [&](User *Usr) {
6443         if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Usr)) {
6444           if (I->getParent() != SrcBlock) {
6445             return true;
6446           }
6447         }
6448         return false;
6449       }) == GEPI->users().end())
6450     return false;
6451   // The second elements of the GEP chains to be unmerged.
6452   std::vector<GetElementPtrInst *> UGEPIs;
6453   // Check each user of GEPIOp to check if unmerging would make GEPIOp not alive
6454   // on IndirectBr edges.
6455   for (User *Usr : GEPIOp->users()) {
6456     if (Usr == GEPI) continue;
6457     // Check if Usr is an Instruction. If not, give up.
6458     if (!isa<Instruction>(Usr))
6459       return false;
6460     auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(Usr);
6461     // Check if Usr in the same block as GEPIOp, which is fine, skip.
6462     if (UI->getParent() == SrcBlock)
6463       continue;
6464     // Check if Usr is a GEP. If not, give up.
6465     if (!isa<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr))
6466       return false;
6467     auto *UGEPI = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr);
6468     // Check if UGEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index and GEPIOp is
6469     // the pointer operand to it. If so, record it in the vector. If not, give
6470     // up.
6471     if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(UGEPI))
6472       return false;
6473     if (UGEPI->getOperand(0) != GEPIOp)
6474       return false;
6475     if (GEPIIdx->getType() !=
6476         cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1))->getType())
6477       return false;
6478     ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1));
6479     if (TTI->getIntImmCost(UGEPIIdx->getValue(), UGEPIIdx->getType())
6480         > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
6481       return false;
6482     UGEPIs.push_back(UGEPI);
6483   }
6484   if (UGEPIs.size() == 0)
6485     return false;
6486   // Check the materializing cost of (Uidx-Idx).
6487   for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) {
6488     ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1));
6489     APInt NewIdx = UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue();
6490     unsigned ImmCost = TTI->getIntImmCost(NewIdx, GEPIIdx->getType());
6491     if (ImmCost > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
6492       return false;
6493   }
6494   // Now unmerge between GEPI and UGEPIs.
6495   for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) {
6496     UGEPI->setOperand(0, GEPI);
6497     ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1));
6498     Constant *NewUGEPIIdx =
6499         ConstantInt::get(GEPIIdx->getType(),
6500                          UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue());
6501     UGEPI->setOperand(1, NewUGEPIIdx);
6502     // If GEPI is not inbounds but UGEPI is inbounds, change UGEPI to not
6503     // inbounds to avoid UB.
6504     if (!GEPI->isInBounds()) {
6505       UGEPI->setIsInBounds(false);
6506     }
6507   }
6508   // After unmerging, verify that GEPIOp is actually only used in SrcBlock (not
6509   // alive on IndirectBr edges).
6510   assert(find_if(GEPIOp->users(), [&](User *Usr) {
6511         return cast<Instruction>(Usr)->getParent() != SrcBlock;
6512       }) == GEPIOp->users().end() && "GEPIOp is used outside SrcBlock");
6513   return true;
6514 }
6515 
6516 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT) {
6517   // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from
6518   // stepping on each other's toes.
6519   if (InsertedInsts.count(I))
6520     return false;
6521 
6522   if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
6523     // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG)
6524     // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up.  If we detect such a
6525     // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here.
6526     if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) {
6527       P->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
6528       P->eraseFromParent();
6529       ++NumPHIsElim;
6530       return true;
6531     }
6532     return false;
6533   }
6534 
6535   if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) {
6536     // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have
6537     // already been constant folded.  The only reason NOT to constant fold
6538     // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant
6539     // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist
6540     // the address of globals out of a loop).  If this is the case, we don't
6541     // want to forward-subst the cast.
6542     if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0)))
6543       return false;
6544 
6545     if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL))
6546       return true;
6547 
6548     if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) {
6549       /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't
6550       /// fit in one register
6551       if (TLI &&
6552           TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(),
6553                              TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) ==
6554               TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) {
6555         return SinkCast(CI);
6556       } else {
6557         bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I);
6558         return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I);
6559       }
6560     }
6561     return false;
6562   }
6563 
6564   if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
6565     if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters())
6566       return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI, TLI);
6567 
6568   if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) {
6569     LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
6570     if (TLI) {
6571       bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI);
6572       unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace();
6573       Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS);
6574       return Modified;
6575     }
6576     return false;
6577   }
6578 
6579   if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) {
6580     if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI))
6581       return true;
6582     SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
6583     if (TLI) {
6584       unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace();
6585       return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1),
6586                                 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS);
6587     }
6588     return false;
6589   }
6590 
6591   if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) {
6592       unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace();
6593       return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(),
6594                                 RMW->getType(), AS);
6595   }
6596 
6597   if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) {
6598       unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace();
6599       return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(),
6600                                 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS);
6601   }
6602 
6603   BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I);
6604 
6605   if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) &&
6606       EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI)
6607     return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts);
6608 
6609   if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr ||
6610                 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) {
6611     ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1));
6612     if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn())
6613       return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL);
6614 
6615     return false;
6616   }
6617 
6618   if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) {
6619     if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) {
6620       /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast
6621       Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(),
6622                                         GEPI->getName(), GEPI);
6623       NC->setDebugLoc(GEPI->getDebugLoc());
6624       GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC);
6625       GEPI->eraseFromParent();
6626       ++NumGEPsElim;
6627       optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT);
6628       return true;
6629     }
6630     if (tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GEPI, TTI)) {
6631       return true;
6632     }
6633     return false;
6634   }
6635 
6636   if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
6637     return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT);
6638 
6639   if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I))
6640     return optimizeSelectInst(SI);
6641 
6642   if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I))
6643     return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI);
6644 
6645   if (auto *Switch = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(I))
6646     return optimizeSwitchInst(Switch);
6647 
6648   if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I))
6649     return optimizeExtractElementInst(I);
6650 
6651   return false;
6652 }
6653 
6654 /// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse
6655 /// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true.
6656 static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL,
6657                            const TargetLowering &TLI) {
6658   if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6659       !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE,
6660                                     TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true)))
6661     return false;
6662 
6663   SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts;
6664   if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts))
6665     return false;
6666   Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back();
6667   I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst);
6668   RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I);
6669   return true;
6670 }
6671 
6672 // In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used
6673 // across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time
6674 // selection.
6675 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT) {
6676   SunkAddrs.clear();
6677   bool MadeChange = false;
6678 
6679   CurInstIterator = BB.begin();
6680   while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) {
6681     MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT);
6682     if (ModifiedDT)
6683       return true;
6684   }
6685 
6686   bool MadeBitReverse = true;
6687   while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) {
6688     MadeBitReverse = false;
6689     for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) {
6690       if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) {
6691         MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true;
6692         ModifiedDT = true;
6693         break;
6694       }
6695     }
6696   }
6697   MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB);
6698 
6699   return MadeChange;
6700 }
6701 
6702 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
6703 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
6704 // find a node corresponding to the value.
6705 bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) {
6706   bool MadeChange = false;
6707   for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
6708     Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr;
6709     for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) {
6710       Instruction *Insn = &*BI++;
6711       DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn);
6712       // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These
6713       // intrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca)
6714       // being taken.  They should not be moved next to the alloca
6715       // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to
6716       // where said address is used.
6717       if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) {
6718         PrevNonDbgInst = Insn;
6719         continue;
6720       }
6721 
6722       Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue());
6723       if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) {
6724         // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert
6725         // after it.
6726         if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
6727           continue;
6728         LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n"
6729                           << *DVI << ' ' << *VI);
6730         DVI->removeFromParent();
6731         if (isa<PHINode>(VI))
6732           DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt());
6733         else
6734           DVI->insertAfter(VI);
6735         MadeChange = true;
6736         ++NumDbgValueMoved;
6737       }
6738     }
6739   }
6740   return MadeChange;
6741 }
6742 
6743 /// Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t.
6744 static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) {
6745   uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse;
6746   uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / std::numeric_limits<uint32_t>::max()) + 1;
6747   NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale;
6748   NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale;
6749 }
6750 
6751 /// Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like:
6752 /// \code
6753 ///   %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6754 ///   %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6755 ///   %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1
6756 ///   br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6757 /// \endcode
6758 /// into multiple branch instructions like:
6759 /// \code
6760 ///   bb1:
6761 ///     %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6762 ///     br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2
6763 ///   bb2:
6764 ///     %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6765 ///     br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6766 /// \endcode
6767 /// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations
6768 /// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is
6769 /// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions.
6770 ///
6771 /// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG.
6772 ///
6773 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) {
6774   if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive())
6775     return false;
6776 
6777   bool MadeChange = false;
6778   for (auto &BB : F) {
6779     // Does this BB end with the following?
6780     //   %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6781     //   %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6782     //   %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2
6783     //   br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2"
6784     BinaryOperator *LogicOp;
6785     BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB;
6786     if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB)))
6787       continue;
6788 
6789     auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator());
6790     if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
6791       continue;
6792 
6793     unsigned Opc;
6794     Value *Cond1, *Cond2;
6795     if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6796                              m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
6797       Opc = Instruction::And;
6798     else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6799                                  m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
6800       Opc = Instruction::Or;
6801     else
6802       continue;
6803 
6804     if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ||
6805         !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp()))   )
6806       continue;
6807 
6808     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump());
6809 
6810     // Create a new BB.
6811     auto TmpBB =
6812         BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split",
6813                            BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode());
6814 
6815     // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the
6816     // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction.
6817     Br1->setCondition(Cond1);
6818     LogicOp->eraseFromParent();
6819 
6820     // Depending on the condition we have to either replace the true or the
6821     // false successor of the original branch instruction.
6822     if (Opc == Instruction::And)
6823       Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB);
6824     else
6825       Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB);
6826 
6827     // Fill in the new basic block.
6828     auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB);
6829     if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) {
6830       I->removeFromParent();
6831       I->insertBefore(Br2);
6832     }
6833 
6834     // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be
6835     // replaced in one successor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from
6836     // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one
6837     // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target
6838     // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition
6839     // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that
6840     // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes.
6841     // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch
6842     // instruction (or any other instruction).
6843     if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
6844       std::swap(TBB, FBB);
6845 
6846     // Replace the old BB with the new BB.
6847     for (PHINode &PN : TBB->phis()) {
6848       int i;
6849       while ((i = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0)
6850         PN.setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB);
6851     }
6852 
6853     // Add another incoming edge form the new BB.
6854     for (PHINode &PN : FBB->phis()) {
6855       auto *Val = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB);
6856       PN.addIncoming(Val, TmpBB);
6857     }
6858 
6859     // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder::
6860     // FindMergedConditions).
6861     if (Opc == Instruction::Or) {
6862       // Codegen X | Y as:
6863       // BB1:
6864       //   jmp_if_X TBB
6865       //   jmp TmpBB
6866       // TmpBB:
6867       //   jmp_if_Y TBB
6868       //   jmp FBB
6869       //
6870 
6871       // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB.
6872       // The requirement is that
6873       //   TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB)
6874       //     = TrueProb for original BB.
6875       // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6876       // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice
6877       // assumes that
6878       //   TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB.
6879       // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for
6880       // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated.
6881       uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
6882       if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
6883         uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6884         uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight;
6885         scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6886         Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6887                          .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6888 
6889         NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6890         NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight;
6891         scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6892         Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6893                          .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6894       }
6895     } else {
6896       // Codegen X & Y as:
6897       // BB1:
6898       //   jmp_if_X TmpBB
6899       //   jmp FBB
6900       // TmpBB:
6901       //   jmp_if_Y TBB
6902       //   jmp FBB
6903       //
6904       //  This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB.
6905 
6906       // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB.
6907       // The requirement is that
6908       //   FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB)
6909       //     = FalseProb for original BB.
6910       // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6911       // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice
6912       // assumes that
6913       //   FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB.
6914       uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
6915       if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
6916         uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
6917         uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6918         scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6919         Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6920                          .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6921 
6922         NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight;
6923         NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6924         scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6925         Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6926                          .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6927       }
6928     }
6929 
6930     // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never
6931     // available to CodeGenPrepare.
6932     ModifiedDT = true;
6933 
6934     MadeChange = true;
6935 
6936     LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump();
6937                TmpBB->dump());
6938   }
6939   return MadeChange;
6940 }
6941